2017.16 PHASE I AND PHASE II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ...€¦ · ΔΔΔΔΔ addenda (number‐5)...

ΔΔΔΔΔ ADDENDA (NUMBER‐5) ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 009113 ‐ 1/3

2017.16 PHASE I AND PHASE II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS2018 08 08 TROPICAL TEXAS BEHAVIORAL HEALTH ‐ EDINBURG, TX.

DOCUMENT 009113 – ADDENDA (NUMBER‐5)

1.1 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Name: TROPICAL TEXAS BEHAVIORAL HEALTH PHASE I AND PHASE II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS

B. Owner: Tropical Texas Behavioral Health

C. Architect: Rike‐Ogden‐Figueroa‐Allex Architects, Inc. (ROFA)

D. Architect Project Number: 2017.16.

E. Date of Addendum: August 08, 2018.

1.2 NOTICE TO BIDDERS

A. This Addendum is issued to all registered plan holders pursuant to the Instructions to Bidders and Conditions of the Contract. This Addendum serves to clarify, revise, and supersede information in the Project Manual, Drawings, and previously issued Addenda. Portions of the Addendum affecting the Contract Documents will be incorporated into the Contract by enumeration of the Addendum in the Owner/Contractor Agreement.

B. The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the appropriate space on the Bid Form.

C. The date for receipt of proposals is unchanged by this Addendum, at same time and location.

1. Proposal Submittal Date: Tuesday, August 14, 2018 ΔΔ

1.3 ATTACHMENTS

A. This Addendum includes attachments: 1. 154 – 8.5x11 Letter size sheets. (Documents/Specifications) 2. 30 – 24x36 Arch‐D size sheets. (Drawings)

B. Structural Addendum #5 description sheet with Engineer’s Seal, dated 08/08/2018, (new). C. MEP Addendum #5 description sheet with Engineer’s Seal, dated 08/08/2018, (new).

D. This Addendum includes the following attached Documents and Specification Sections: 1. Document 00 01 10 – TABLE OF CONTENTS, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 2. Section 01 40 00 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 3. Section 01 42 00 – REFERENCES, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 4. Section 01 45 23 – TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 5. Section 01 78 39 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 6. Section 06 41 13 – WOOD‐VENEER‐FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS, dated



08/08/2018, (reissued). 7. Section 07 27 26 – FLUID‐APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 8. Section 08 41 13 – ALUMINUM‐FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS, dated

08/08/2018, (reissued). 9. Section 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 10. Section 08 80 00 – GLAZING, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 11. Section 10 26 00 – WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 12. Section 10 44 16 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 13. Section 12 48 13 – ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 14. Section 23 09 00 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC, dated 06/15/2018,

(new). 15. Section 32 13 16 – DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 16. Section 32 13 16 – PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued).

E. This Addendum includes the following attached Sheets:

1. Structural Sheet S2.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 2. Structural Sheet S4.3, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 3. Structural Sheet S5.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 4. Structural Sheet S5.2, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 5. Structural Sheet S6.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 6. Architectural Sheet AS1.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 7. Architectural Sheet AS1.2, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 8. Architectural Sheet A7.1, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 9. Architectural Sheet A7.2, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 10. Architectural Sheet A7.3, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 11. Architectural Sheet A9.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 12. Architectural Sheet A9.3, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 13. Mechanical Sheet MD1.1, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 14. Mechanical Sheet M1.2, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 15. Mechanical Sheet M1.3, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 16. Mechanical Sheet M1.5, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 17. Mechanical Sheet M3.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 18. Mechanical Sheet M4.1, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 19. Mechanical Sheet M4.2, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 20. Electrical Sheet ES1.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 21. Electrical Sheet ED2.0, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 22. Electrical Sheet E1.6, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 23. Electrical Sheet E1.7, dated 08/08/2018, (new). 24. Electrical Sheet E2.2, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 25. Electrical Sheet E2.5, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 26. Electrical Sheet E2.7, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 27. Electrical Sheet E4.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 28. Electrical Sheet E7.1, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 29. Electrical Sheet E7.2, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued). 30. Electrical Sheet E7.3, dated 08/08/2018, (reissued).



1.4 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

A. General RFIs (Questions and Answers)

1. Q: Please indicate who will pay for permitting fees? A: the permit/inspection fees are paid for by the Contractor; this is covered in the General Conditions of the Contract – A201 2017 Article 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws.

2. Q: Where does Transportation Stop Shelter call for in Section 107343 Transportation Stop Shelters go on site? A: Specification Section 107343 Transportation Stop Shelters to be deleted in its entirety from this project.

3. Q: Sheet C‐2 added water meters for the Tropical Texas Bldg. and the Storage Bldg. but none for the Commercial Bldg. Is this correct? A: Refer to sheet P2.4 Plumbing Domestic Water Plan, Keyed Note number 1. Provide 1‐inch water meter and backflow as required; this for a total of 8 spaces. Total number of water meters and backflow preventers for commercial building is 8 of each.

4. Q: Good afternoon I have a question on floor plan on the 2 x 6 aluminum storefront is it flush glaze or Curtin wall? And also, what type of insulating glass unit is it is it one inch and color? A: Refer to revised Section 08 41 13 – ALUMINUM‐FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS.

5. Q: What is the makeup of the exterior insulated glass and inboard lite? Also, what is the

glazing requirements for the interior glass? A: Refer to revised Section 08 80 00 – GLAZING.

6. Q: Will the paver sample area pavers be used for the installation pavers? A: Refer to revised Section 32 14 13 – Precast Concrete Unit Paving.

7. Q: Pipe bollards are not shown at the dumpster pad. Typically, 2 ea would be behind each dumpster and 1 on each side of the pad for a total of 8 ea. Should we include these in our estimate? A: Refer to revised sheets AS1.2

END OF DOCUMENT 009113

HINOJOSA ENGINEERING, INC. Civil Engineering • Structural Engineering 108 West 18th Street Mission, Texas 78572

(956) 581-0143 Fax (956) 581-2074 Registration Number F-908 Expiration Date 09/30/2018

STRUCTURAL ADDENDUM NO. 5

TROPICAL TEXAS BEHAVIORAL HEALTH

PHASE I AND PHASE II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS DATE: August 8, 2018 PROJECT: 17-147 The following Structural Addendum items shall be incorporated into the plans and specifications and shall become part of the construction documents.

Item #1. Foundation demolition key notes “D” and “E” on Sheet S2.1 have been revised. Replace Sheet S2.1 with new attached 24x36 Sheet S2.1.

Item #2. Replace Sheet S4.3 with new attached 24x36 Sheet S4.3.


Item #4. Details 1 and 2 on Sheet S5.2 has been revised and new detail 15 has been added. Replace Sheet S5.2 with new attached 24x36 Sheet S5.2.


END OF STRUCTURAL ADDENDUM NO. 5

T

E

E

R

W.R.HINOJOSA

P

FOET

S

TA

65228

L

TEG

IS

E

N

SI

O A

R

F

O

E

R

S

R

EAS

X

E

I N

G

ED

N

x/x/13 8/8/2018 P: 956.973.0500 | F: 956.351.5750 www.trinitymep.com | Copyright 2018 Texas Registered Engineering Firm No. - F10362

Addendum #5 P a g e | 1

ADDENDUM #5

Architect: ROFA ARCHITECTS Project Name: PHASE I & PHASE II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS – TROPICAL TEXAS BEHAVIORAL HEALTH Project Number: 17.4.25 Date: 8/8/2018

Note: The work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgement that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

I. Specifications:

A. Specification section 23 09 00 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC shall

replace section 23 09 23 – DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC w/

updated specification, refer to attached.

II. General: N/A

III. Mechanical:

A. Sheet M1.2 – added T-stats, refer to attached.

B. Sheet M1.3 – added T-stats, refer to attached.

C. Sheet M3.1 – added AHU/CU-9 to AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDUL, refer to

attached.

D. Sheet M4.1 – new sheet for controls diagrams and sequences, refer to attached.

E. Sheet M4.2 – new sheet for controls diagrams and sequences, refer to attached.

F. Sheet M1.5 – New sheet and layout for Phase I, refer to attached.

G. Sheet MD1.1 – New sheet and layout for Phase 1, refer to attached.

IV. Electrical:

A. Sheet ES1.1 – Revised keyed notes, refer to attached.

B. Sheet ED2.0 – New sheet and layout for Phase I, refer to attached.

C. Sheet E1.6 – Revised keyed notes, refer to attached.

D. Sheet E1.7 – New sheet and layout for Phase I, refer to attached.

E. Sheet E2.2 – Revised keyed notes and layout, refer to attached.

F. Sheet E2.5 – Revised keyed notes and receptacle layouts, refer to attached.

G. Sheet E2.7 – New sheet and layout for Phase I, refer to attached.

x/x/13 8/8/2018

P: 956.973.0500 | F: 956.351.5750 www.trinitymep.com | Copyright 2018 Texas Registered Engineering Firm No. - F10362

Addendum #5

P a g e | 2

H. Sheet E4.1 – Revised Lighting Control Legend, refer to attached.

I. Sheet E7.1 – Revised disconnect schedule and panel schedules, refer to

attached.

J. Sheet E7.2 – Revised panel schedules, refer to attached.

K. Sheet E7.3 – Revised panel schedules, refer to attached.

V. Plumbing: N/A

VI. Fire Protection: N/A


PHASE‐I & PHASE‐II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS

Table of Contents – 08/08/2016

Division Section Title Pages

ΔΔΔΔΔ TABLE OF CONTENTS

ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 0 ‐ 1/6

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP

DIVISION 00 ‐ PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 01 .... PROJECT TITLE PAGE ................................................................................................................. 1

00 01 07 .... SEALS PAGE ............................................................................................................................... 2

00 11 19.11 REQUEST FOR COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL...................................................................... 6

00 21 16.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS ................................................................................................. 8

00 25 16 .... PRE‐PROPOSAL MEETINGS ........................................................................................................ 2

00 26 00 .... PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 2

00 31 26 .... EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION .................................................................... 1

00 31 32 .... GEOTECHNICAL DATA ............................................................................................................... 102

00 42 13 .... PROPOSAL FORM ‐ STIPULATED SUM (SINGLE‐PRIME CONTRACT) ......................................... 4

00 43 11.11 SUBCONTRACTORS ANS SUPPLIERS FORM ............................................................................... 1

00 43 16 .... PROPOSAL SECURITY FORMS .................................................................................................... 1

00 43 21 .... ALLOWANCE FORM ................................................................................................................... 1

00 43 22 .... UNIT PRICES FORM .................................................................................................................... 2

00 43 23 .... ALTERNATES FORM ................................................................................................................... 2

00 43 73 .... PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM ................................................................................. 1

00 43 93.11 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST ........................................................................................... 2

00 60 00 .... PROJECT FORMS ........................................................................................................................ 2

00 73 16 .... INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 1

00 73 46 .... WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE .......................................................................................... 5

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

General Requirements Subgroup

DIVISION 01 ‐ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 .... SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 6

01 21 00 .... ALLOWANCES ............................................................................................................................ 6

01 21 43 .... TIME ALLOWANCES ................................................................................................................... 4

01 22 00 .... UNIT PRICES .............................................................................................................................. 3

01 23 00 .... ALTERNATES .............................................................................................................................. 2

01 25 00 .... SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES .................................................................................................... 4

01 26 00 .... CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 3

01 29 00 .... PAYMENT PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................ 6

01 31 00 .... PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ....................................................................... 13

01 32 00 .... CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ....................................................................... 11

01 32 33 .... PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................................... 3

01 33 00 .... SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................... 11

01 35 13.11 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR EXISTING CONDITIONS ................................................... 1







01 35 16 .... ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES ........................................................................................ 10

01 40 00 .... QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 12

01 42 00 .... REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 8

01 45 23 .... TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES ........................................................................................ 4

01 50 00 .... TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .................................................................................. 12

01 56 39 .... TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION............................................................................ 1

01 60 00 .... PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................ 7

01 73 00 .... EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................ 12

01 74 19 .... CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL ......................................................... 4

01 77 00 .... CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES .......................................................................................................... 7

01 78 23 .... OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................................................................... 9

01 78 39 .... PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................ 5

01 79 00 .... DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ............................................................................................ 7

Facility Construction Subgroup

DIVISION 02 ‐ EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 16 .... STRUCTURE DEMOLITION ......................................................................................................... 8

02 41 19 .... SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ............................................................................................................ 9

DIVISION 03 ‐ CONCRETE

03 30 00 .... CAST‐IN‐PLACE CONCRETE ........................................................................................................ 27

03 30 53 .... MISCELLANEOUS CAST‐IN‐PLACE CONCRETE ........................................................................... 16

DIVISION 04 ‐ MASONRY

04 20 00 .... UNIT MASONRY ......................................................................................................................... 28

04 73 00 .... MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY ......................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 05 ‐ METALS

05 12 00 .... STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING .................................................................................................. 14

05 21 00 .... STEEL JOIST FRAMING ............................................................................................................... 7

05 31 00 .... STEEL DECKING .......................................................................................................................... 9

05 40 00 .... COLD‐FORMED METAL FRAMING ............................................................................................. 21

05 50 00 .... METAL FABRICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 21

DIVISION 06 ‐ WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 16 00 .... SHEATHING................................................................................................................................ 7

06 41 13 .... WOOD‐VENEER‐FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS ................................................................. 5

DIVISION 07 ‐ THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 .... THERMAL INSULATION .............................................................................................................. 5

07 26 26 .... FLUID‐APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS............................................................................... 5







07 27 15 .... NONBITUMINOUS SELF‐ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS ........................................................ 5

07 42 13.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS .......................................................................... 7

07 54 00.11 FULLY ADHERED MULTI‐PLY ROOF SYSTEM .............................................................................. 21

07 62 00 .... SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.......................................................................................... 16

07 62 00.11 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES ................................................................. 7

07 84 43 .... JOINT FIRESTOPPING ................................................................................................................. 6

07 92 00 .... JOINT SEALANTS ........................................................................................................................ 12

DIVISION 08 ‐ OPENINGS

08 11 13 .... HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES..................................................................................... 7

08 14 16 .... FLUSH WOOD DOORS ............................................................................................................... 9

08 33 23 .... OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ..................................................................................................... 8

08 41 13 .... ALUMINUM‐FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ........................................................... 8

00 42 26 .... ALL‐GLASS ENTRANCES ............................................................................................................. 7

08 71 00 .... DOOR HARDWARE .................................................................................................................... 21

08 80 00 .... GLAZING .................................................................................................................................... 14

DIVISION 09 ‐ FINISHES

09 22 16 .... NON‐STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ....................................................................................... 10

09 24 00 .... CEMENT PLASTERING ................................................................................................................ 8

09 29 00 .... GYPSUM BOARD ........................................................................................................................ 8

09 30 13 .... CERAMIC TILING ........................................................................................................................ 19

09 51 13 .... ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ................................................................................................... 10

09 65 13 .... RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................... 6

09 65 19 .... RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ......................................................................................................... 8

09 68 13 .... TILE CARPETING ........................................................................................................................ 8

09 72 00 .... WALL COVERINGS ..................................................................................................................... 7

09 91 00 .... INTERIOR & EXTERIOR PAINTING .............................................................................................. 19

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES ΔΔΔΔΔ

10 14 19 .... DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE ............................................................................................... 5

10 14 23.13 ROOM‐IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE ............................................................................................. 10

10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS ............................................................................................ 6

10 26 00 .... WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION ................................................................................................ 6

10 28 00 .... TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES ............................................................................ 7

10 44 13 .... FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS ..................................................................................................... 5

10 44 16 .... FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ................................................................................................................. 4

10 71 13 .... EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES ............................................................................................ 5

DIVISION 12 ‐ FURNISHINGS

12 21 13 .... LOUVER BLINDS ......................................................................................................................... 6







12 36 61.19 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS.................................................................................. 6

12 48 13 .... ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES .................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 13 ‐ SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 34 19 .... METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................... 37

Facility Services Subgroup

DIVISION 21 ‐ FIRE SUPPRESSION ΔΔΔΔΔ

21 13 13 .... WET‐PIPE SPRINKLER SYSEMS ................................................................................................... 15

DIVISION 22 ‐ PLUMBING

22 00 00 .... PLUMBING ................................................................................................................................. 2

22 05 00 .... COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ............................................................................. 8

22 05 29 .... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ..................................... 3

22 05 53 .... IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT..................................................... 2

22 07 19 .... PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION ................................................................................................ 11

22 11 16 .... DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ........................................................................................................ 5

22 11 19 .... DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES .................................................................................... 6

22 13 13 .... FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS ...................................................................................................... 4

22 13 19 .... SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ..................................................................................... 4

22 33 00 .... ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS ..................................................................................... 2

22 42 00 .... COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES ......................................................................................... 5

22 47 13 .... DRINKING FOUNTAINS .............................................................................................................. 3

DIVISION 23 ‐ HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) ΔΔΔΔΔ

23 00 00 .... HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) ...................................................... 2

23 05 00 .... COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC ...................................................................................... 9

23 05 29 .... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .............................................. 6

23 05 93 .... TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.................................................................. 11

23 07 13 .... DUCT INSULATION ..................................................................................................................... 5

23 09 00 .... INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC ........................................................................ 25

23 23 00 .... REFRIGERANT PIPING ................................................................................................................ 7

23 31 13 .... METAL DUCTS............................................................................................................................ 6

23 33 00 .... AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................ 5

23 33 46 .... FLEXIBLE DUICTS ....................................................................................................................... 2

23 34 16 .... CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS ........................................................................................................ 5

23 37 13 .... DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES ....................................................................................... 2







DIVISION 26 ‐ ELECTRICAL

26 00 00 .... ELECTRICAL ................................................................................................................................ 2

26 01 20 .... OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE OF LOW‐VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION ................. 13

26 05 00 .... COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ............................................................................ 9

26 05 19 .... LOW‐VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLE .............................................. 3

26 05 26 .... GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .......................................................... 8

26 05 29 .... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .............................................................. 2

26 05 33 .... RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ................................................................... 7

26 05 43 .... UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ...................................... 2

26 05 53 .... IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................. 5

26 05 53 .... IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 2

26 05 73 .... POWER SYSTEM STUDIES .......................................................................................................... 7

26 09 23 .... LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES .................................................................................................... 7

26 22 13 .... LOW‐VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS ...................................................................... 1

26 24 16 .... PANELBOARDS .......................................................................................................................... 7

26 27 26 .... WIRING DEVICES ....................................................................................................................... 4

26 28 13 .... FUSES ......................................................................................................................................... 3

26 28 16.16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES ................................................................................................................ 2

26 43 13 .... SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW‐VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS ................... 4

26 51 00 .... INTERIOR LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 6

26 56 00 .... EXTERIOR LIGHTING .................................................................................................................. 4

DIVISION 27 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 33 .... CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS ............................................. 1

DIVISION 28 ‐ ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 00 .... INTRUSION DETECTION ............................................................................................................. 17

28 46 21.11 ADDRESSABLE FIRE‐ALARM SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 10

Site and Infrastructure Subgroup

DIVISION 31 ‐ EARTHWORK

31 10 00 .... SITE CLEARING ........................................................................................................................... 7

31 20 00 .... EARTH MOVING ........................................................................................................................ 15

31 23 16 .... EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................................. 2

31 23 16.13 TRENCHING ............................................................................................................................... 10

31 31 16 .... TERMITE CONTROL .................................................................................................................... 7

31 41 33 .... TRENCH SHIELDING ................................................................................................................... 8

31 63 29 .... DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS .................................................................................... 11







DIVISION 32 ‐ EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS ΔΔΔΔΔ

32 11 13 .... SUBGRADE MODIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... 2

32 11 13.13 LIME‐TREATED SUBGRADES ...................................................................................................... 5

32 11 16.16 AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSES ............................................................................................... 9

32 12 13.19 PRIME COATS ............................................................................................................................ 4

32 12 16 .... ASPHALT PAVING ...................................................................................................................... 19

32 13 16 .... DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING .............................................................................................. 5

32 14 13 .... PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING ........................................................................................... 3

32 16 13 .... CURBS AND GUTTERS ................................................................................................................ 4

32 84 23 .... UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS .................................................................................................... 5

32 90 00 .... PLANTING .................................................................................................................................. 8

32 91 13 .... SOIL PREPARATION ................................................................................................................... 1

32 91 19.13 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING ....................................................................................... 1

32 92 13 .... HYDRO‐MULCHING ................................................................................................................... 1

DIVISION 33 ‐ UTILITIES

33 05 76 .... FIBERGLASS MANHOLES ............................................................................................................ 13

33 14 11 .... WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION PIPING .................................................................................... 17

33 14 19 .... VALVES AND HYDRANTS FOR WATER UTILITY SERVICE ............................................................ 5

33 31 11 .... PUBLIC SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING ........................................................................ 17

33 42 11 .... STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING ................................................................................................ 25

33 42 31 .... STORMWATER AREA DRAINS AND INLETS ................................................................................ 4

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

ΔΔΔΔΔ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 014000 ‐ 1/12


SECTION 014000 ‐ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality‐assurance and quality‐control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality‐assurance and quality‐control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality‐assurance and quality‐control services required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for testing and inspection allowances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality‐Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on‐site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.



C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub‐subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade‐specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

D. Mockups: Full‐size physical assemblies that are constructed on‐site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full‐size physical assemblies constructed and tested at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on‐site as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and equipment; and lighting.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

G. Source Quality‐Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Quality‐Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

J. Quality‐Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality‐control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect.



1.4 DELEGATED‐DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups.

1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.

B. Delegated‐Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Quality‐Control Plan: For quality‐assurance and quality‐control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality‐control personnel.



C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic‐force‐resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

2. Main wind‐force‐resisting system or a wind‐resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality‐control service.

F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY‐CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality‐Control Plan, General: Submit quality‐control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality‐assurance and quality‐control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Quality‐Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality‐assurance and quality‐control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality‐control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.



C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality‐control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor‐performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor‐performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor‐elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality‐control tests and inspections from field quality‐control tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections.

3. Owner‐performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by Commissioning Authority.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.



B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory‐Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory‐authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory‐authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in‐service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory‐authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in‐service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in‐service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing



engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory‐Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and

analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site‐assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality‐assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each



report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication,

or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re‐review of each mockup.

7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials. Comply with requirements in "Mockups" Paragraph.

M. Room Mockups: Construct room mockups according to approved Shop Drawings or as indicated on Drawings incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Comply with requirements in "Mockups" Paragraph.

N. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality‐control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspection allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.



3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality‐control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality‐control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality‐control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality‐control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed.

4. Where quality‐control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality‐control service.

5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality‐control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in‐situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality‐control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory‐authorized service representative to inspect field‐assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."



F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality‐control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality‐assurance and quality‐control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality‐control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality‐control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality‐control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.



3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality‐control service to Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality‐control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality‐control service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available testing agencies offering services that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Millennium Engineering Group

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.



3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality‐control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality‐control services.

END OF SECTION 014000

ΔΔΔΔΔ REFERENCES ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 014200 ‐ 1/9


SECTION 014200 ‐ REFERENCES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if



bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. The information in this list is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. AABC ‐ Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA ‐ American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO ‐ Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO ‐ American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC ‐ American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA ‐ American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA ‐ American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI ‐ American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org. 9. ACPA ‐ American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete‐pipe.org. 10. AEIC ‐ Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 11. AF&PA ‐ American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA ‐ American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 13. AHAM ‐ Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI ‐ Air‐Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 15. AI ‐ Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 16. AIA ‐ American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC ‐ American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 18. AISI ‐ American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 19. AITC ‐ American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc‐glulam.org. 20. AMCA ‐ Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI ‐ American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 22. AOSA ‐ Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.



23. APA ‐ APA ‐ The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA ‐ Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 25. API ‐ American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 26. ARI ‐ Air‐Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI ‐ American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 28. ARMA ‐ Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASCE ‐ American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 30. ASCE/SEI ‐ American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See

ASCE). 31. ASHRAE ‐ American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air‐Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME ‐ ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);

www.asme.org. 33. ASSE ‐ American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 34. ASSE ‐ American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse‐plumbing.org. 35. ASTM ‐ ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS ‐ Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AWEA ‐ American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 38. AWI ‐ Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 39. AWMAC ‐ Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;

www.awmac.com. 40. AWPA ‐ American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 41. AWS ‐ American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 42. AWWA ‐ American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 43. BHMA ‐ Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 44. BIA ‐ Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 45. BICSI ‐ BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 46. BIFMA ‐ BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association); www.bifma.org. 47. BISSC ‐ Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 48. BWF ‐ Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);

www.bissc.org. 49. CDA ‐ Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CE ‐ Conformite Europeenne; http://ec.europa.eu/growth/single‐market/ce‐marking/. 51. CEA ‐ Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 52. CEA ‐ Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 53. CFFA ‐ Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 54. CFSEI ‐ Cold‐Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 55. CGA ‐ Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 56. CIMA ‐ Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 57. CISCA ‐ Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 58. CISPI ‐ Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 59. CLFMI ‐ Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 60. CPA ‐ Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 61. CRI ‐ Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet‐rug.org. 62. CRRC ‐ Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 63. CRSI ‐ Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 64. CSA ‐ CSA Group; www.csagroup.com.



65. CSA ‐ CSA International; www.csa‐international.org. 66. CSI ‐ Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 67. CSSB ‐ Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 68. CTI ‐ Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 69. CWC ‐ Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 70. DASMA ‐ Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 71. DHI ‐ Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 72. ECA ‐ Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 73. ECAMA ‐ Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA). 74. ECIA ‐ Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org. 75. EIA ‐ Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 76. EIMA ‐ EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 77. EJMA ‐ Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 78. ESD ‐ ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 79. ESTA ‐ Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 80. ETL ‐ Intertek (See Intertek); www.intertek.com. 81. EVO ‐ Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo‐world.org. 82. FCI ‐ Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 83. FIBA ‐ Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball

Federation); www.fiba.com. 84. FIVB ‐ Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);

www.fivb.org. 85. FM Approvals ‐ FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 86. FM Global ‐ FM Global; (Formerly: FMG ‐ FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 87. FRSA ‐ Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com. 88. FSA ‐ Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 89. FSC ‐ Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 90. GA ‐ Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 91. GANA ‐ Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 92. GS ‐ Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 93. HI ‐ Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 94. HI/GAMA ‐ Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 95. HMMA ‐ Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 96. HPVA ‐ Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 97. HPW ‐ H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 98. IAPSC ‐ International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 99. IAS ‐ International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 100. ICBO ‐ International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 101. ICC ‐ International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 102. ICEA ‐ Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 103. ICPA ‐ International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa‐hq.org. 104. ICRI ‐ International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 105. IEC ‐ International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 106. IEEE ‐ Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 107. IES ‐ Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of

North America); www.ies.org. 108. IESNA ‐ Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).



109. IEST ‐ Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 110. IGMA ‐ Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 111. IGSHPA ‐ International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 112. ILI ‐ Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 113. Intertek ‐ Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com. 114. ISA ‐ International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems,

and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 115. ISAS ‐ Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 116. ISFA ‐ International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid

Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 117. ISO ‐ International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 118. ISSFA ‐ International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 119. ITU ‐ International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 120. KCMA ‐ Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 121. LMA ‐ Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 122. LPI ‐ Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 123. MBMA ‐ Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 124. MCA ‐ Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 125. MFMA ‐ Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 126. MFMA ‐ Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 127. MHIA ‐ Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 128. MIA ‐ Marble Institute of America; www.marble‐institute.com. 129. MMPA ‐ Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 130. MPI ‐ Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 131. MSS ‐ Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;

www.mss‐hq.org. 132. NAAMM ‐ National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 133. NACE ‐ NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);

www.nace.org. 134. NADCA ‐ National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 135. NAIMA ‐ North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 136. NBGQA ‐ National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 137. NBI ‐ New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 138. NCAA ‐ National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 139. NCMA ‐ National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 140. NEBB ‐ National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 141. NECA ‐ National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 142. NeLMA ‐ Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 143. NEMA ‐ National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 144. NETA ‐ InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 145. NFHS ‐ National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 146. NFPA ‐ National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 147. NFPA ‐ NFPA International; (See NFPA). 148. NFRC ‐ National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 149. NHLA ‐ National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 150. NLGA ‐ National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 151. NOFMA ‐ National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).



152. NOMMA ‐ National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 153. NRCA ‐ National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 154. NRMCA ‐ National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 155. NSF ‐ NSF International; www.nsf.org. 156. NSPE ‐ National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 157. NSSGA ‐ National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 158. NTMA ‐ National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 159. NWFA ‐ National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 160. PCI ‐ Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 161. PDI ‐ Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 162. PLASA ‐ PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA ‐ Entertainment Services and Technology Association);

www.plasa.org. 163. RCSC ‐ Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 164. RFCI ‐ Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 165. RIS ‐ Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 166. SAE ‐ SAE International; www.sae.org. 167. SCTE ‐ Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 168. SDI ‐ Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 169. SDI ‐ Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 170. SEFA ‐ Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 171. SEI/ASCE ‐ Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See

ASCE). 172. SIA ‐ Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 173. SJI ‐ Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 174. SMA ‐ Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 175. SMACNA ‐ Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;

www.smacna.org. 176. SMPTE ‐ Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 177. SPFA ‐ Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 178. SPIB ‐ Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 179. SPRI ‐ Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 180. SRCC ‐ Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar‐rating.org. 181. SSINA ‐ Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 182. SSPC ‐ SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 183. STI ‐ Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 184. SWI ‐ Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 185. SWPA ‐ Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 186. TCA ‐ Tilt‐Up Concrete Association; www.tilt‐up.org. 187. TCNA ‐ Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 188. TEMA ‐ Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 189. TIA ‐ Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA ‐

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.

190. TIA/EIA ‐ Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

191. TMS ‐ The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 192. TPI ‐ Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 193. TPI ‐ Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.



194. TRI ‐ Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 195. UL ‐ Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 196. UNI ‐ Uni‐Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni‐bell.org. 197. USAV ‐ USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 198. USGBC ‐ U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 199. USITT ‐ United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 200. WA ‐ Wallcoverings Association; www.wallcoverings.org. 201. WASTEC ‐ Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 202. WCLIB ‐ West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 203. WCMA ‐ Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 204. WDMA ‐ Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 205. WI ‐ Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 206. WSRCA ‐ Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 207. WWPA ‐ Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. DIN ‐ Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO ‐ International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;

www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC ‐ International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC‐ES ‐ ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc‐es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE ‐ Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC ‐ Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC ‐ Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov. 4. DOD ‐ Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE ‐ Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA ‐ Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA ‐ Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG ‐ Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA ‐ General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD ‐ Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL ‐ Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA ‐ Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD ‐ Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB ‐ Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program;

The National Academies; www.trb.org.



15. USDA ‐ Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.

16. USDA ‐ Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDOJ ‐ Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP ‐ U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS ‐ United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR ‐ Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD ‐ Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

3. DSCC ‐ Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED‐STD ‐ Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS ‐ Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;

www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org.

6. MILSPEC ‐ Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB ‐ United States Access Board; www.access‐board.gov. 8. USATBCB ‐ U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB).

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal‐

iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development;

www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.



PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION (Not Used)


ΔΔΔΔΔ TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 014523 ‐ 1/4


SECTION 014523 – TESTING AND INSECTING SERVICES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Materials Testing. 2. Special Inspections.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination” for general coordination procedures.

2. Section 013200 “Construction Progress Documentation” for contractor’s construction schedule.

3. Section 013300 “Submittals Procedures” for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

4. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Measurement and Payment:

1. Costs for testing and inspecting construction work required of the Contract Documents will be charged to Owner.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspection construction work that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality‐control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality‐control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality‐control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.



2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality‐control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed.

4. Where quality‐control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality‐control service.

5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

B. Retesting/Reinspection: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality‐control services, including retesting and reinspection, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in‐situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality‐control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

D. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality‐control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project

site.



E. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality‐assurance and quality‐control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Where quality‐control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform.

a. Millennium Engineers Group 5804 Gumwood Avenue, Pharr, Texas 78577 (956) 702‐8500

2.2 NOTIFICATION OF TESTING AND INSPECTION RESULTS

A. Test and Inspection Failure: 1. Laboratory/Agency shall notify Owner, Architect and Contractor in written form, via

email, of any tests or inspections performed that fail to meet contract documents. 2. Notification shall be provided same day the results are obtained.

2.3 ADDITIONAL TESTING

A. Additional testing or inspections for interest and benefit of the Contractor shall be paid for directly by the contractor.

B. Additional testing or inspections for the interest and benefit of the Owner shall be verified by the Architect/Engineer and approved by the Owner prior to conducting such tests or inspections.


3.1 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality‐control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality‐



control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


ΔΔΔΔΔ PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 017839 ‐ 1/5


SECTION 017839 ‐ PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating project record documents covering the Work of multiple contracts.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 4. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit one paper‐copy set(s) of marked‐up record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit one paper‐copy set(s) of marked‐up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files.



B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked‐up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record‐keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked‐up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked‐up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross‐reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.



n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked‐up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red‐colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked‐up record prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for

resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract

Drawings for use in recording information.

a. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor.



1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

1.6 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

1.7 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.



1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS



ΔΔΔΔΔ WOOD‐VENEER‐FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 064113 ‐ 1/5


SECTION 064113 ‐ WOOD‐VENEER‐FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Submittals: Shop Drawings, Samples showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish and AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

D. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is completed, and HVAC system is operating.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: AWI, AWMAC, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

B. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish: Premium grade.

1. Type of Construction: Face frame. 2. Cabinet Door and Drawer Style: Reveal overlay. 3. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: White birch. 4. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn. 5. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels; unless otherwise

indicated on drawings. 6. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 7. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match. 8. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Same species and cut indicated for

exposed surfaces. 9. Drawer Subfronts, Sides, and Backs: Solid‐hardwood lumber, same species indicated for

exposed surfaces. 10. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Medium‐Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.



C. Veneer‐Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP‐1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening, self‐closing.

B. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2‐1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter.

C. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; brushed stainless steel, three‐pin type with shelf hold‐down clip.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD‐100. 2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD‐200. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1. 4. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD‐100.

G. Cabinet Bumpers: Clear rubber, self‐adhesive.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.

1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

J. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire‐retardant‐treated lumber, kiln dried to 15 percent moisture content.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

2.5 SHOP FINISHING OF WOOD CABINETS

A. Finishes: Same grades as items to be finished.

B. Finish cabinets at the fabrication shop; defer only final touchup until after installation.



1. Apply one coat of sealer or primer to concealed surfaces of cabinets. Apply two coats to end‐grain surfaces.

2. Apply a wash coat sealer to woodwork made from closed‐grain wood before staining and finishing.

3. After staining, if any, apply paste wood filler to open‐grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System ‐ 9, UV curable acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Wash Coat for Closed‐Grain Woods: Apply wash‐coat sealer to cabinets made from

closed‐grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match Architect’s approved sample for color. 5. Open Finish for Open‐Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open‐grain woods. 6. Filled Finish for Open‐Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash‐coat sealer and allow to

dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 7. Sheen: Satin, 31‐45 or Semigloss, 46‐60 gloss units measured on 60‐degree gloss meter

per ASTM D 523.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop‐fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back priming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.



1. For shop finished items use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96‐inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16

inches o.c. with:

a. No. 10 wafer‐head screws sized for not less than 1‐1/2‐inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

b. No. 10 wafer‐head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

c. Toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.

H. Refer to Section 09 91 00 "Painting" and Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi‐exposed surfaces. Touch up shop‐applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.



C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


ΔΔΔΔΔ FLUID‐APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 07 27 26 ‐ 1/5


SECTION 07 27 26 ‐ FLUID‐APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vapor‐permeable, fluid‐applied air barriers.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For coatings, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: For coatings, indicating compliance with requirements for low‐emitting materials.

C. Shop Drawings: For air‐barrier assemblies.

1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie‐ins with adjoining construction.


A. Product certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Field quality‐control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.



1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly, 150 sq. ft., incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air‐barrier assembly.

a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection and testing of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.

b. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less.

B. Low‐Emitting Materials: VOC emissions of products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Formaldehyde emissions shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m or 7 ppb, whichever is less.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Air‐Barrier Performance: Air‐barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid‐water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air‐barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air‐Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.

2.3 HIGH‐BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR PERMEABLE

A. High‐Build, Vapor‐Permeable Air Barrier: Modified bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 40 mils or thicker over smooth, void‐free substrates.

1. Synthetic Polymer Type:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:



1) Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. ‐‐ Conn. 2) Henry Company, Sealants Division. 3) Tremco Incorporated. 4) STS Coatings, Wall Guardian FW‐100A 5) Dupont Tyvek, Fuild Applied WB with silyl‐terminated polyether (STPE)

technology.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57‐lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A.

c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to

ASTM D 4541. e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly. f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 90 days according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air‐barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air‐barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air‐barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.


3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust‐free, and dry substrate for air‐barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate‐patching material.

D. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.



E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

F. Bridge isolation joints, expansion joints and discontinuous wall‐to‐wall, deck‐to‐wall, and deck‐to‐deck joints with air‐barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials according to air‐barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air‐barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

B. Connect and seal exterior wall air‐barrier material continuously to roofing‐membrane air barrier, concrete below‐grade structures, floor‐to‐floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain‐wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

C. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

D. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fish‐mouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

E. High‐Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air‐barrier material to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air‐barrier material in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.

1. Vapor‐Permeable, High‐Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 40 mils, applied in two or more equal coats.

F. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.

G. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air‐barrier components.



3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:

1. Air‐barrier dry film thickness. 2. Air‐Leakage‐Location Testing: Air‐barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air

leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers.

3. Air‐Leakage‐Volume Testing: Air‐barrier assemblies will be tested for air‐leakage rate according to ASTM E 2357.

4. Adhesion Testing: Air‐barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof.

C. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

1. Apply additional air‐barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.

2. Remove and replace deficient air‐barrier components for retesting as specified above.

D. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air‐barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove masking materials after installation.

END OF SECTION 07 27 26

ΔΔΔΔΔ ALUMINUM‐FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 08 41 13 ‐ 1/9


SECTION 08 41 13 ‐ ALUMINUM‐FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Interior storefront framing. 3. Storefront framing for punched openings. 4. Exterior manual‐swing entrance doors and door‐frame units.





B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low‐

emitting materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full‐size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

D. Samples: For each exposed finish required.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

F. Delegated‐Design Submittal: For aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.




A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC‐certified energy performance values from manufacturer.

B. Product test reports.

C. Field quality‐control reports.

D. Sample warranties.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long‐term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16‐inch clearance between framing members and operable units.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 11 feet 8‐1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8‐1/4 inches.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:



1. When tested at positive and negative wind‐load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind‐load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static‐air‐pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static‐air‐pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static‐air‐pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static‐air‐pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind‐load design pressure, but not less than 8 lbf/sq. ft..

H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U‐factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U‐factor of not more than 0.50 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.25 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC‐certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.

I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company. 2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.



3. Tubelite Inc.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded‐ or formed‐aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: a. Exterior Frame System: 2 x 6‐inch, Thermal Break – Storefront. b. Interior Frame System: 2 x 4 1/2‐inch.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. 4. Finish: Dark Bronze anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field‐fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high‐strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc‐rich, corrosion‐resistant primer complying with SSPC‐PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC‐SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold‐Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot‐Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual‐swing operation.



1. Door Construction: 1‐3/4‐inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125‐inch‐thick, extruded‐aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High‐performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5‐inch nominal width, with 10‐1/4” bottom rail. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap‐on, extruded‐aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed‐corner pressure‐glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.



6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory‐installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA‐M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Dark bronze.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.



D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather‐stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field‐Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface‐mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Quality‐Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts.

1. Water‐Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

B. Aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.



3.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. Reference Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.


ΔΔΔΔΔ DOOR HARDWARE ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 08 71 00 ‐ 1/24


SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system, including any electrified hardware components, systems, controls and hardware for aluminum entrance doors. Any door shown on the drawing and not specifically referenced in the hardware sets shall be provided with identical hardware as specified on other similar openings and shall be included in the General Contractor’s base bid. All fire rated door shall be provided with fire rated hardware as required by local code Authority as part of the General Contractor’s base bid. The hardware supplier shall verify all cylinder types specified for locking devices supplied as part of the door system with the door manufacturer and/or door supplies.

B. The General Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies (five (5)

days prior to bid date) that could and/or would result in hardware being supplied that is none functional, hardware specified and/or hardware that has not been specified that will result in any code violations and any door that is not covered in this specification. Failure of the General Contractor to address any such issue could be considered acceptance of the hardware specified and all discrepancies could be corrected at the General Contractor’s expense.

C. Items include but are not limited to the following:

1. Hinges ‐ Pivots 2. Flush Bolts 3. Exit Devices 4. Locksets and Cylinders 5. Push Plates ‐ Pulls 6. Coordinators 7. Closers 8. Kick, Mop and Protection Plates 9. Stops, Wall Bumpers, Overhead Controls 10. Electrified Hold Open Devices 11. Thresholds, Seals and Door Bottoms 12. Silencers 13. Miscellaneous Trim and Accessories

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK specified elsewhere that should be examined for its effect upon this section:

A. Section 06 20 00 ‐ Finish Carpentry



B. Section 08 11 13 – Steel Doors and Frames C. Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors D. Sections within 08 31 13 – Access Doors E. Section within 08 41 13 – Aluminum Entrances, Storefront and Window Framing F. Sections within 08 80 00 – Glass and Glazing G. Sections within 09 91 00 ‐ Painting H. Division 26 – Electrical I. Division 28 – Access Control

1.04 REFERENCES SPECIFIED in this section subject to compliance as directed:

A. NFPA‐80 ‐ Standard for Fire Doors and Windows B. NFPA‐101 ‐ Life Safety Code C. ADA ‐ The Americans with Disabilities Act ‐ Title III ‐ Public Accommodations D. ANSI‐A 117.1 ‐ American National Standards Institute ‐ Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities E. ANSI‐A 156.5 ‐ American National Standards institute ‐Auxiliary Locks and Associated

Products F. UFAS ‐ Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards G. UL ‐ Underwriter’s Laboratories H. WHI ‐ Warnock Hersey International, Testing Services I. State and Local Codes including Authority Having Jurisdiction J. UL10C – Positive Pressure K. IBC‐2015 – International Building Code L. NFPA‐70 – International Electrical Code

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. HARDWARE SCHEDULES submit copies of schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. Schedule to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, including: handing of opening, all hardware scheduled for opening or otherwise required to allow for proper function of door opening as intended, and finish of hardware. At doors with door closers or door controls include degree of door opening. Supply the schedules all Finish Hardware within two (2) weeks from date purchase order is received by the hardware supplier.

B. Submit manufacturer’s cut/catalog sheets on all hardware items and any required

special mounting instructions with the hardware schedule. C. Certification of Compliance:

1. Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance to these specifications as required.

2. Submit a statement from the manufacturer that electronic hardware and systems being supplied comply with the operational descriptions exactly as specified.

D. Submit any samples necessary as required by the Architect.



E. Templates for finish hardware items to be sent to related door and frame suppliers

within three (3) working days of receipt of approved hardware schedule. F. Doors and Frames used in positive pressure opening assemblies shall meet UL10C in

areas where this specification includes Seals for smoke door. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Hardware supplier to be a qualified, Factory Authorized, direct distributor of the products to be furnished. In addition, the supplier to have in their regular employment an AHC or AHC /CDC and/or a person of equivalent experience (minimum fifteen (15) years in the industry) who will be made available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect/Contractor and/or the Building Owner regarding any matters affecting the finish hardware on this project.

B. All hardware used in labeled fire or smoke rated openings to be listed for those types of

openings and bear the identifying label or mark indicating UL. (Underwriter’s Laboratories) approved for fire. Exit devices in non‐labeled openings to be listed for panic.

1.07 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND PACKAGING

A. Furnish all hardware with each unit clearly marked and numbered in accordance with the hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each.

B. Pack each item of hardware completes with all necessary parts and fasteners.

C. Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches and dents during delivery and

storage. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

Any part of the finish hardware required by the frame or door manufacturers or other suppliers that is needed to produce doors or frames is to be sent to those suppliers in a timely manner, so as not to interrupt job progress.

1.09 WARRANTY

All finish hardware shall be supplied with a One‐ (1) year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing with substantial completion of the project except as follows:

1. All Closers are to have a thirty‐ (30) year written warranty. 2. All Exit Devices (Grade 1) are to have a three‐ (3) year written warranty. 3. All ND Series Locksets are to have a ten‐ (10) year written warranty. 4. All L9000 Series Locksets Locks are to have a three‐ (3) year written warranty. 5. All Continuous Hinges are to have a ten‐ (10) year written warranty.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FASTENERS

A. Furnish with finish hardware all necessary screws, bolts and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for a long life under hard use.

B. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts and other

anchors designated by the Architect according to the material to which the hardware is to be applied and the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer. All closers and exit devices on labeled wood doors shall be through‐bolted if required by the door manufacturer. All thresholds shall be fastened with wood screws and plastic anchors. Where specified in the hardware sets, security type fasteners of the type called for are to be supplied.

C. Design of all fastenings shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish.

D. All hardware shall be installed with the Manufacturers standard screws as provided. The

use of any other type of fasteners shall not be permitted. The general contractor shall provide wood blocking in all stud walls specified and/or scheduled to receive wall stops, No Exception.

2.02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERN FOR PACKAGING

The hardware shall ship to the job site is to be packaged in biodegradable packs such as paper or cardboard boxes and wrapping.

2.03 HINGES

A. All hinges to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity and consideration of warranty. Provide one of the following manufacturers Ives, ABH, Zero, Hager, Select or Stanley.

B. Unless otherwise specified provide five‐knuckle, heavy‐duty, button tip, full mortise

template type hinges with non‐rising loose pins. Provide non‐removable pins for out swinging doors at secured areas or as called for in this specification (Refer to 3.02 Hardware Sets).

C. Provide all out‐swinging doors with non‐removable pins or security studs as called for in

3.02 Hardware Sets. Furnish three (3) hinges up to 90 inches high and one (1) additional hinge for every 30 inches or fraction thereof.

D. Furnish three (3) hinges up to 90 inches high and one (1) additional hinge for every 30

inches or fraction thereof.



E. Provide size 4½” x 4½” for all 1¾” thick doors up to and including 36 inches wide. Doors over 1¾” through 2¼” thick, use 5” x 5” hinges. Doors over 36 inches use 5” x 4½” unless otherwise noted in 3.02 Hardware Sets.

F. Were required to clear the trim and/or to permit the doors to swing 180 degrees furnish

hinges of sufficient throw.

G. Provide heavy weight hinges on all doors over 36 inches in width.

H. At labeled door’s steel or stainless steel, bearing‐type hinges shall be provided. For all doors equipped with closers provide bearing‐type hinges.

2.04 LOCK AND LOCK TRIM

A. All the locksets, latch sets, and trim to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. Locksets specified are Schlage “ND” series with the Sparta lever and L9000 SL1 as specified. No Substitution.

B. Provide metal wrought box strike boxes and curved lip strikes with proper lip length to

protect trim of the frame, but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond frame trim or the inactive leaf of a pair of doors.

C. Mechanical Locks shall meet ANSI Operational Grade 1, Series 1000 & 4000 as specified.

1. Hand of lock is to be field reversible or non‐handed. 2. All lever trim is to be through‐bolted through the door. 3. Provide all pairs of doors with a ¾” latch bolt throw. 4. Provide all doors specified with sound seal with a 3‐3/4” extended back‐set.

2.05 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Provide all exterior and interior locks or Exit Devices requiring cylinders keyed to a New Schlage LFIC Everest Master Key System or to the Existing Schlage Everest Master Key System as instructed by the facility representative. All cylinders shall comply with performance requirements of ANSI A156.5. All keys shall be of nickel silver material only. The hardware supplier shall meet with the General Contractor, the Architect and the Facility Owners Representative at the project jobsite to determine all permanent keying requirements. The hardware supplier shall provide One (1) Knox Box if required by the local Fire Marshall. The contractor shall, as required by the local Fire Marshall and the Facility Owner mount the Knox Box.

B. Cylinders shall be factory keyed and factory maintained as directed by the Building

Owner and the Architect. Provide three‐ (3) keys per cylinder and six‐ (6) master keys per master used.

C. Factory stamp all keys “Do not duplicate” and with key symbol as directed by the

Building Owner. Visual key control shall be provided on all permanent keys and cylinders.



D. Provide all locks with construction master keyed cores for the complete duration of construction.

2.06 EXIT DEVICES

A. All exit devices and trim, including electrified items, to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed and in the hardware sets for continuity of design and consideration of warranty; electrified devices and trim to be the same series and design as mechanical devices and trim.

B. Exit Devices to be “UL” listed for life safety. All exit devices for labeled doors shall have

“UL” label for “Fire Exit Hardware”. All devices mounted on labeled wood doors are to be through‐bolted or per the manufacturer’s listing requirements. All devices shall conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 requirements.

C. All exit devices to be of a heavy duty, chassis mounted design, with a one‐piece

removable cover, eliminating necessity of removing the device from the door for standard maintenance and keying requirements.

D. All trims to be through‐bolted to the lock stile case. Lever design to be the same as

specified with the lock sets (“Sparta” #17 lever design).

E. Exit Devices shall be the modern push rail design. All exit devices shall be mounted with sex bolts.

F. All devices shall carry a three‐ (3) year warranty against manufacturing defects and

workmanship. Exit devices shall be certified by an independent testing lab for a minimum of 1,000,000 cycles.

G. Furnish roller strikes for all rim and surface vertical rod exit devices. Internal springs

shall be coil compression type. Furnish security dead latching for all active latch bolts. Latch bolts to have self lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear. Plated latch bolts not accepted.

H. All Exit Devices shall be field modifiable as incorporate an Electric Latch Retraction

Feature without the purchase of new Panic Exit Hardware.

J. Exit Devices shall be the Von Duprin “99” series as specified. No Substitution. 2.07 SURFACE MOUNTED DOOR CLOSERS

A. All closers for this project shall be the products of a single manufacturer for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. All door closers shall be mounted as to achieve the maximum degree of opening (trim permitting).

B. All closers to be heavy duty, surface‐mounted, fully hydraulic, rack and pinion action

with high strength cast iron cylinder to provide control throughout the entire door opening cycle.



C. Size all closers in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations at the factory.

D. All closers to have adjustable spring power sizes 1 or 2 through 4 or 6 and separate

tamper resistant, brass, non‐critical regulating screw valves for closing speed, latching speed and back‐check control as a standard feature unless specified other wise.

E. All closer covers to be rectangular, full cover type of non‐ferrous, non‐corrosive material

painted to match closer. Provide closer covers only if provided as a standard part of the door closer package.

F. Closers shall have heavy‐duty arms. All closer arms shall be of sufficient length to

accommodate the reveal depth and to insure proper installation. The hardware supplier shall provide all required brackets, spacers or filler plates as required by the manufacture for a proper and functional installation as part of their base bid.

G. Supply appropriate arm assembly for each closer so that closer body and arm are

mounted on non‐public side of door opening and on the interior side of exterior openings, except where required otherwise in the hardware sets.

1. All parallel arm mounted closers to be factory indexed to insure proper

installation. 2. Furnish heavy‐duty cold forged parallel arms for all parallel arm mounted

closers.

H. Provide closers with special application and heavy‐duty arms as specified in the hardware sets or as otherwise called for to insure a proper operating, long lasting opening. Drop plates and any additional mounting brackets required for the proper installation of the door closer shall be included in the hardware supplier’s base bid.

I. Finish: Baked on Powder Coated finish shall match other hardware.

J. Provide and mount all door closers with sex bolts as provided by the manufacturer.

K. Closers shall be LCN 4040XP and 1460 series as specified or acceptable products

manufactured by Sargent 281 series. 2.08 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Door stops are to be furnished for every door leaf. Every door is to have a floor, wall, or an overhead stop.

B. Place doorstops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing, but do not

present a hazard of obstruction. Furnish floor strikes for floor holders of proper height to engage holders of doors.

C. Where overhead stops and holders are specified, or otherwise required for proper door

operation, they are to be heavy duty and of extruded brass, bronze or stainless steel



with no plastic parts as specified. The General Contractor shall provide wood blocking in all stud walls specified and scheduled to receive wall stops.

D. Finish: Shall match other hardware where available.

E. Acceptable Products

1. Floor and wall stops as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent products as

manufactured by Ives, ABH, Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. 2.09 PUSH PLATES, DOOR PULLS, AND KICKPLATES

A. All push plates, door pull, kick plates and other miscellaneous hardware as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent products as manufactured by Ives, ABH, Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable.

B. Kick plates to be 10 inches high and Mop plates to be 6 inches high, both by 2 inches or 1

inch less than door width (LDW) as specified. They are to be of 16‐gauge thick base metal. For door with louvers or narrow bottom rails, kick plate height to be 1 inch less dimension shown from the bottom of the door to the bottom of the louver or glass.

C. Where required armor plates, edge guards and other protective hardware shall be

supplied in sizes as scheduled in the hardware sets. D. Finish: Same as other hardware where available. 2.10 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS

A. Provide Flush bolts with Dust Proof Strikes as indicated in the individual hardware sets by Ives, ABH, Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. Finish shall match the adjacent hardware.

2.11 THRESHOLDS AND SEALS

A. Provide materials and finishes as listed in hardware sets. National Guard Products has been specified to set a high level of quality, equivalent product by manufactured by Zero, and Pemko shall be acceptable. All thresholds must be in accordance with the requirements of the ADA and ANSI A117.1.

B. Provide thresholds with wood screws and plastic anchors. Supply all necessary

anchoring devices for weather strip and sound seal.

C. Seals shall comply with requirements of U.B.C. 7‐2‐97 and UL10C. All thresholds, door bottoms and weather strip inserts shall be a silicone based product as specified in 3.02 Hardware Sets. Other materials used shall be rejected, unless originally specified.

D. Seals shall comply with the requirements of the Wood Door Manufacturer’s certification

requirements.



E. All thresholds shall be provided with none slip coating as specified in the hardware sets.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Finishes for all hardware are as required in this specification and the hardware sets.

B. Special care is to be taken to make uniform the finish of all various manufactured items. 2.13 DOOR SILENCERS

A. Provide door silencers at all openings without gasket. Provide two‐ (2) each at pair of doors and three‐ (3) or four‐ (4) each for each single door (coordinate with the frame manufacturer).

2.14 KEY CABINET & KNOX BOXES

A. Provide a key cabinet Lund 1200 series (two tag system) for installation by the contractor as instructed by the Architect and Owners Representative. Key Cabinet shall be of such size as to hold 150% of the total number of keys supplied for this project.

B. The hardware supplier shall assist Owners Representative in the tagging of all keys and

instruct the Owners staff as to the proper use of the key cabinet system at the project site. Training shall include industry standard procedures for maintaining a key system. The hardware supplier shall provide Owners Representative two‐ (2) complete full‐size copies of the floor plans complete with the door number and key symbol shown at each door opening. One‐ (1) copy shall be placed in the key cabinet and one‐ (1) copy shall be turned over to the Owners Representative. Training shall be based on eight‐ (8) hours maximum. The hardware supplier shall send a list of all staff members trained in the proper use of the key cabinet to the Owners Representative and the Architect.

C. Provide four (4) Knox Boxes Surface Mounted which shall be installed as required by the

Architect and/or Owners Representative. 2.15 PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS

A. References to specific products are used to establish quality standards of utility and performance. Unless otherwise approved provide only the specified product.

B. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper

finish hardware installation, are to be selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect and the Building Owner.

C. Architect and the Building Owner reserve the right to approve all the substitutions

proposed for this specification. All requests for substitution to be made prior to bid in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, and are to be in writing, hand delivered to the Architect. Two (2) copies of the manufacturer’s brochures and a



physical sample of each item in the appropriate design and finish shall accompany requests for substitution.

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE ITEMS OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. All finish hardware shall be installed by an experienced finish hardware installer with at least ten (10) years experience after a pre‐installation meeting between the contractor, hardware Manufacturers representative, the hardware supplier, the hollow metal supplier and the wood door supplier. The finish hardware installer shall be responsible for the proper installation and function of all doors and hardware.

B. The hardware supplier’s office and/or warehouse shall be located within a one hundred

twenty‐five (125) mile radius of the project site as to better service the general contractor and the Facility Owner during this project.

C. Check hardware against the reviewed hardware schedule upon delivery. Store the

hardware in a dry and secure location to protect against loss and damage.

D. Install finish hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule and manufacturers’ printed instructions. Pre‐fit hardware before finish is applied to door; remove and reinstall after finish is complete and dry. Install and adjust hardware so that parts operate smoothly, close tightly, and do not rattle.

E. Mortise and cutting to be done neatly, and evidence of cutting to be concealed in the

finished work. Protect all Finish hardware from scratching or other damage. 3.02 HARDWARE SETS HARDWARE GROUP NO. 001 FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): Q106 S100C S100D EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 EA LFIC CYLINDER RIM/MORTISE AS REQ. 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 101G

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): S101 S102 EACH TO HAVE:



QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A‐DOOR WIDTH A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 103

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): B110 B112 F103 F104 F105 F106 F107 Q117 F110 F111 F113 F114 F115 F116 F117 F118 F119 H103 H105 H106 H107A H107B H108 H109 H110 H111 H112 H113 H114 H115 H116 H117 Q105 Q107 Q108 Q109 Q110 Q111 Q112 Q113 Q114 Q115 Q116 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 103A

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): F108 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND80TDEU SPA RX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE



1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHER POWER SOURCE PROVIDED BY OTHER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): H100 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 103B

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): B107 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA ROLLER BUMPER RB471 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 103T

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): Q100 Q101 Q102 Q103 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE



3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): C107 C113A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TDEU SPA RX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐

RATED DOORS) BK ZER

CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHER POWER SOURCE PROVIDED BY OTHER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A105 B109 B115 C102 C105 C108 S105 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): C106 F100 H104 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR



2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND80TDEU SPA RX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHER POWER SOURCE PROVIDED BY OTHER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): C111 S106 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG1 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SHCUSH TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A101 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 SET FLUSH BOLTS FB51P/FB61P AS REQ 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA OH STOP 104S 630 GLY 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE



1 EA ASTRAGAL 43SP‐DOOR HEIGHT SP ZER 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

PROVIDE 7/8" LTC STRIKE.


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): C113B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 SET FLUSH BOLTS FB51P/FB61P AS REQ 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH TBSRT 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA ASTRAGAL 43SP‐DOOR HEIGHT SP ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER

PROVIDE 7/8" LTC STRIKE.


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): B102 B116 C100 C101 C103 C104 C109 C110 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S SPA 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐

RATED DOORS) BK ZER




FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): S104 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S SPA 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A‐DOOR WIDTH A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): F112 Q104A B114 B104 B105 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S SPA 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐

RATED DOORS) BK ZER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 108 113 F109 H102A H102B Q104B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TDEU SPA RX 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE



1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐RATED DOORS)

BK ZER



FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): S103 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S SPA 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A‐DOOR WIDTH A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 110 114 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TDEU SPA RX 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐

RATED DOORS) BK ZER



FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S):



A104 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐

RATED DOORS) BK ZER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): B103A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TDEU SPA RX 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐

RATED DOORS) BK ZER



FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): B106 B111 B113 H101 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE



HARDWARE GROUP NO. 503B

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): B108 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD SPA 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA ROLLER BUMPER RB471 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): C112 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD‐9947‐EO 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD‐9947‐NL‐OP‐110MD 626 VON 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20‐079 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH TBSRT 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER 1 SET MEETING STILE 328AA‐2 PCS – DOOR HEIGHT AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 101 A100 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR



2 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD‐DOOR HEIGHT 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD‐9947‐EO 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD‐9947‐NL‐OP‐110MD 626 VON 3 EA LFIC CYLINDER RIM/MORTISE AS REQ. 626 SCH 3 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 3 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" O 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 4040XP‐18PA 4040XP‐30 689 LCN 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): G100B H100B C100B D100B E100B F100B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99‐NL‐990NL 628 VON 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20‐079 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 715AA

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A102 B103B S100A S100B S100E EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

2 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE QEL‐RX‐99‐NL‐990NL SNB 628 VON 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20‐079 626 SCH



1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHER POWER SOURCE PROVIDED BY OTHER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): B100 C100A D100A E100A F100A G100A H100A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD‐DOOR HEIGHT 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99‐NL‐OP‐110MD 628 VON 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20‐079 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" O 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 4040XP‐18PA 4040XP‐30 689 LCN 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 715AB

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 104 116 123 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 EA CONT. HINGE A110HD R TW8‐DOOR HEIGHT 628 ABH 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE QEL‐RX‐99‐NL‐OP‐110MD 628 VON 1 EA RIM HOUSING 20‐079 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" O 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 4040XP‐18PA 4040XP‐30 689 LCN 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA‐FRAME WIDTH PLUS 4” AA ZER



1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA‐DOOR WIDTH AA ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A‐V3‐223‐FRAME WIDTH A ZER PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHER POWER SOURCE PROVIDED BY OTHER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 800AV

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 102 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

2 EA CONT. HINGE A110HD R TW8‐DOOR HEIGHT 628 ABH 1 EA PANIC DEVICES QEL‐RX‐9947‐NL‐OP‐110MD‐RHR 628 VON 1 EA PANIC DEVICES QEL‐RX‐9947‐EO‐LHR 628 VON 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" O 630 IVE 1 EA LFIC CYLINDER RIM/MORTISE AS REQ. 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" O 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 4040XP‐18PA 4040XP‐30 689 LCN PERIMETER SEAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHER POWER SOURCE PROVIDED BY OTHER



3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630AM IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 4" X 16" 630AM IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RA/PA TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 801C




3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630AM IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 4" X 16" 630AM IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 SCUSH TBSRT 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HARDWARE GROUP NO. G801

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 103 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 EA LFIC CYLINDER RIM/MORTISE AS REQ. 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23‐030 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CONST. CORE 23‐030 ICX 622 SCH CARD READER PROVIDED BY OTHER POWER SOURCE PROVIDED BY OTHER BALANCE OF HARDWARE PROVIDED BY THE DOOR MFG

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 401AA

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): 201 202 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TDEU SPA RX 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 REG OR PA AS REQ 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B‐CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 8145S‐BK H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON‐

RATED DOORS) BK ZER


ΔΔΔΔΔ GLAZING ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 08 80 00 ‐ 1/14


SECTION 08 80 00 ‐ GLAZING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, storefront framing and glazed curtain walls.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.


1. Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum‐Framed Entrances and Storefronts."

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z97.1 American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

B. ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 162 Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products 2. ASTM C 1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass 3. ASTM C 1048 Standard Specification for Heat‐Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT

Coated and Uncoated 4. ASTM C 1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass 5. ASTM E 2188 Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance 6. ASTM E 2189 Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulating Glass

Units 7. ASTM E 2190 Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and

Evaluation



1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating‐glass unit that contains dehydrated air or other specified gas.

E. Sealed Insulating Glass Unit Surface Designation:

1. Surface 1 – Exterior surface of the outer glass lite. 2. Surface 2 – Interspace surface of the outer glass lite. 3. Surface 3 – Interspace surface of the inner glass lite. 4. Surface 4 – Interior surface of the inner glass lite.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.

1. Clear glass. 2. Tinted glass. 3. Coated glass. 4. Laminated glass. 5. Insulating glass.



C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants and colored spacers, in 12‐inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated‐Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturers of insulating‐glass units with sputter‐coated, low‐E coatings, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

1. For solar‐control low‐e‐coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that fabricator of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: For tinted glass insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36‐month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating‐Glass Units with Sputter‐Coated, Low‐E Coatings: A qualified insulating‐glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated‐glass manufacturer.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: PPG Certified Fabricator Network, as acceptable to the manufacturer.

C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

D. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.



E. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum‐Framed Entrances and Storefronts" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.10 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass‐framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint‐preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating‐glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.



1.13 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated‐Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated‐glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated‐glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated‐glass standard.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating‐glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


D. Installer's Warranty for Installation of glazing systems:


PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™. 4. Pilkington North America. 5. PPG Flat Glass; PPG Industries, Inc. 6. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.



B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain reflective‐coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project

according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest

part of the glass. 5. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15

degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001. 6. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center‐of‐glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short‐side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

7. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic‐glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.



2. For laminated‐glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating‐glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 4. U‐Factors: Center‐of‐glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat‐Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center‐of‐glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center‐of‐glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM‐3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating‐Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat‐strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat‐strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat‐strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality‐Q3.



1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller‐hearth) process with roll‐wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating‐Glass Units: Factory‐assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Comply with requirements in Section 079200 ‐ Joint Sealants. Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary sealants.

2. Spacer: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. 4. Corner Construction: Manufacturer’s standard corner construction.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating‐glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral‐curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.



1. Basis‐of‐Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Corning Corporation ; Dow Corning® 790 Silicone Building Sealant. or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. or approved equal.

2. Applications: Unprimed adhesion to masonry, particularly effective for sealing expansion and control joints, curtainwall joints, mullion joints and many other construction joints.

C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral‐curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Basis‐of‐Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Corning Corporation; DOW CORNING® 795 SILICONE BUILDING SEALANT or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Applications: Structural and nonstructural glazing, structural attachment of many panel systems, panel stiffener applications, weather sealing of most common construction materials including glass, aluminum, steel, painted metal, granite or stone, concrete, brick and plastics.

D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral‐curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G and A.

1. Basis‐of‐Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Corning Corporation; DOW CORNING® 995 SILICONE STRUCTURAL GLAZING SEALANT or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Applications: Silicone structural glazing and protective glazing.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back‐Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl‐based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.



B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed‐cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a

full bead of liquid sealant.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open‐cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Clean‐cut or flat‐grind vertical edges of butt‐glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.




3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass‐framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.



1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8‐inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge‐shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge‐shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.



3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive‐in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure‐Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure‐glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.



1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.8 MONOLITHIC‐GLASS TYPES (Interior Glazing)

A. Glass Type GL‐1: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required.

3.9 INSULATING‐LAMINATED‐GLASS SCHEDULE (Exterior Glazing)

A. Glass Type IL‐1: Low‐E‐coated, tinted, insulating laminated glass.

1. Basis‐of‐Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc.; Solargray + SolarBan 70XL Clear. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.

a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3 mm. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch.

(3mm Solargray + 030PVB + 3mm Solargray) 5. Tint Color: Gray (Solargray). 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Solarban 70XL Clear fully tempered float glass.

a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm. 8. Low‐E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 9. Winter Nighttime U‐Factor: 0.28 maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U‐Factor: 0.24 maximum. 11. Visible Light Transmittance: 32 percent minimum. 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.24 maximum. 13. Safety glazing required.


ΔΔΔΔΔ WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 10 26 00 ‐ 1/6


SECTION 10 26 00 ‐ WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards.


1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel angle corner guards pipe guards and wheel guards.

2. Section 05 73 00 "Decorative Metal Railings" for metal handrails without plastic bumpers.

3. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for metal and plastic protective trim units, according to BHMA A156.6, used for armor, kick, mop, and push plates.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include fire ratings of units recessed in fire‐rated walls and listings for door‐protection items attached to fire‐rated doors.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Show handrail design and support spacing required to withstand structural loads.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact‐resistant wall‐protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified.

1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:



1. Corner and End‐Wall Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of handrail.

B. Material Certificates: For each type of exposed plastic material.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Wall‐Guard and Handrail Covers: Full‐size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 Insert number percent of each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two, 96‐inch‐ Insert number and size long units.

2. Corner‐Guard Covers: Full‐size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two, 48‐inch‐ long units.

3. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of extra materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra material.


A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well‐ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall‐ and door‐protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until

plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.



a. Store corner‐guard covers in a vertical position. b. Store wall‐guard and handrail covers in a horizontal position.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall‐ and door‐protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall‐ and door‐protection products of each type from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame‐Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke‐Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in 2012 Texas Accessibility Standards and ICC A117.1.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface‐Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90‐ or 135‐degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Construction Specialties, Inc.; CO‐8. b. InPro Corporation (IPC); Stainless Corner Guard (Surface Mount).



c. WallGuard.com; Stainless Corner Guard (Surface Mount).

2. Material: Stainless‐steel sheet, Type 304.

a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch. b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.

3. Wing Size: Nominal 2‐1/2 by 2‐1/2 inches. 4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch. 5. Mounting: Flat‐head, countersunk screws through factory‐drilled mounting holes and

Adhesive.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Plastic Materials: Chemical‐ and stain‐resistant, high‐impact‐resistant plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.

B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S‐PC01, Class 1 or Class 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum impact‐resistance rating of 15 ft.‐lbf/in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

C. Stainless Steel: To be 16 gauge, type 304 alloy with #4 satin finish.

D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless‐steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security‐type fasteners where exposed to view.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Curved Panels: Preform curved semirigid, abuse‐resistant sheet wall covering in factory for radius and sheet thickness as follows:

1. Sheet Thickness of 0.040 Inch: 24‐inch radius. 2. Sheet Thickness of 0.060 Inch: 36‐inch radius.

C. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

D. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

E. Wood Handrails: Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns.



2.6 FINISHES

A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. If not indicated on Drawings, install at heights indicated below:

1. Corner Guards: directly above wall base

2. All outside‐corner locations located along corridors and other pedestrian traffic areas.

C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other accessories required for a complete installation.



1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads. 2. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.

D. Fire Doors: Install protection according to the listing of each item.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia‐based household cleaning agent.


ΔΔΔΔΔ FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 10 44 16 ‐ 1/3


SECTION 10 44 16 ‐ FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand‐carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


1. Section 10 44 13 "Fire Protection Cabinets." 2. Section 23 38 13 "Commercial‐Kitchen Hoods" for fire‐extinguishing systems provided as

part of commercial‐kitchen exhaust hoods.



1. Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Schedules and coordination requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire‐extinguisher schedule with fire‐protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire‐protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND‐CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire‐protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International. b. Badger Fire Protection.



c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. e. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. f. Larsens Manufacturing Company. g. Pyro‐Chem; Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire‐extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry‐Chemical Type (ABC) at General Use areas: UL‐rated 4‐A:80‐B:C, 10‐lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate‐based dry chemical in red enameled‐steel container; with pressure‐indicating gauge.

1. Provide as indicated on drawings. 2. Separation distance shall not exceed 75‐feet of travel distance, between fire

extinguisher locations.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers in fire cabinets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


ΔΔΔΔΔ ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES ROFA ARCHITECTS, INC. 124813 ‐ 1/4


SECTION 124813 ‐ ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roll‐up rail mats. 2. Recessed frames.


1. Section 124816 "Entrance Floor Grilles" for rigid floor grilles and frames.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices. 2. Divisions between mat sections. 3. Perimeter floor frames. 4. Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors.

C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat. 2. Tread Rail: Sample of each type and color. 3. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.




A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Resilient‐Tile Entrance Mats: Full‐size tile units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 units.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

A. Structural Performance: Provide roll‐up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Wheel load of 350 lb per wheel.

B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the TAS's "2012 Texas Accessibility Standards" and ICC A117.1.

2.2 ROLL‐UP RAIL MATS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Balco, Inc. (Basis‐of‐design: FGLP‐D – Designer Style) 2. C/S Group.

B. Roll‐up, Aluminum‐Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded‐aluminum tread rails 1‐1/2 inches wide by 3/8 inch thick, sitting on continuous vinyl cushions.

1. Tread Inserts: Mineral abrasive particles bonded to or embedded in vinyl and 1/4‐inch‐high, 28‐oz./sq. yd. weight, level‐cut, nylon‐pile, fusion‐bonded carpet.

2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

3. Rail Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

4. Hinges: Plastic. 5. Mat Size: As indicated in drawings.



2.3 FRAMES

A. Recessed Frames: Manufacturer's standard extrusion.

1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6061‐T6 or Alloy 6063‐T5, T6, or T52.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

2. Architectural Bronze: ASTM B455, Alloy UNS No. C38500.

2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Provide concrete fill and grout equivalent in strength to cast‐in‐place concrete slabs for recessed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one‐third fill thickness.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.

1. Fabricate edge‐frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.

C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Mill finish.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA‐M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.




3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install recessed mat frames and mats to comply with manufacturer's written instructions so that tops of mats will be flush with adjoining finished flooring. Set mats with tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.

1. For installation in terrazzo flooring areas, allow for grinding and polishing of terrazzo without grinding surface of recessed frames. Coordinate with other trades as required.

2. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location, and secure attachment of frames.

3. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.

4. Delay setting mats until construction traffic has ended.

B. Install surface‐type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.

1. Anchor fixed surface‐type frame members to floor with devices spaced as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

TRINITY MEP ENGINEERING, LLC 23 09 00 ‐ 1/25

2017.16 TTBH PHASE II RENOVATION

2018 06 15 EDINBURG, TX.

SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.0 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Trane

B. Siemens

C. ALC


A. BAS Manufacturer Qualifications

1. The BAS manufacturer shall have an established business office within 50.00 miles of

the project site and must provide 24 hours/day, 7 days/week response in the event of

a customer warranty or service call.

2. The BAS Manufacturer shall have factory trained and certified personnel providing all

engineering, service, startup, and commissioning field labor for the project from their

local office location. BAS manufacturer shall be able to provide training certifications

for all local office personnel upon request.

3. The BAS shall be provided by a single manufacturer and this manufacturer’s

equipment must consist of operator workstation software, Web‐based

hardware/software, Open Standard Protocol hardware/software, Custom application

Programming Language, Graphical Programming Language, Building Controllers,

Custom Application Controllers, and Application Specific Controllers. All other

products specified herein (i.e., sensors, valves, dampers, actuators, etc.) need not be

manufactured by the BAS manufacturer listed in this specification.

4. Independent representatives of BAS manufacturers are not acceptable. BAS vendor

must be corporate owned entity of BAS manufacturer.

1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Standards. The BAS system shall conform to the following:





1. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of 20 dynamic

points. All current data shall be displayed within 10 seconds of the operator’s

request.

2. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within

10 seconds.

3. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by

the operator and the reaction by the device shall be 5 seconds. Analog objects shall

start to adjust within 5 seconds.

4. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted

over the high‐speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or

workstation will be current within the prior 10 seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to

when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 10 seconds.

6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of

running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for

selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

7. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a

selectable frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan and

update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same

frequency.

8. Multiple Alarm Annunciations. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms

within 5 seconds of each other.

9. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all

values reported by the specified system.

a. Table 1: Reporting Accuracy





Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±0.5°C [±1°F]

Ducted Air ±1.0°C [±2°F]

Outside Air ±1.0°C [±2°F]

Water Temperature ±0.5°C [±1°F]

Delta –T ±0.15°C[±0.25°F]

Relative Humidity ±5% RH

Water Flow ±5% of full scale

Air Flow (terminal) ±10% of reading *Note 1

Air Flow (measuring stations) ±5% of reading

Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa [±0.1 "W.G.]

Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa [±0.01 "W.G.]

Water Pressure ±2% of full scale *Note 2

Electrical Power 5% of reading *Note 3

Carbon Monoxide (CO) ± 50 PPM

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ± 50 PPM

Note 1: (10%‐100% of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10%)

Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressure

Note 3: * not including utility supplied meters

1.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. BAS manufacturer shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification

data sheets on all hardware and software being provided for this project. No work may begin

on any segment of this project until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for

conformity with the plan and specifications. Five (5) copies are required. All shop drawings

shall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats once they have

been approved and as‐built drawings have been completed.

B. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review

shall not relieve the BAS manufacturer of furnishing quantities required based upon contract

documents.

C. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed

necessary to determine compliance with the specifications or which is deemed valuable in

documenting and understanding the system to be installed.

D. Submit the following within 90 days of contract award:

1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantities,

manufacturers and model numbers.





2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, pressure drop, model number

(including pattern and connections), flow, CV, body pressure rating, and location.

3. A schedule of all control dampers including damper size, pressure drop,

manufacturer, and model number.

4. Provide all manufacturers’ technical cut sheets for major system components. When

technical cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data

specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other

means. Include:

a. Building Controllers

b. Custom Application Controllers

c. Application Specific Controllers

d. Operator Workstations

e. Portable Operator Terminals

f. Auxiliary Control Devices

5. Provide proposed Building Automation System architectural diagram depicting

various controller types, workstations, device locations, addresses, and

communication cable requirements

6. Provide detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory

terminations, as well as terminal tie‐ins to DDC controls provided by mechanical

equipment manufacturers. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled.

7. Provide points list showing all system objects and the proposed English language

object names.

8. Provide a sequence of operation for each controlled mechanical system and terminal

end devices.

9. Provide a BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each

BACnet system level device (i.e. Building Controller & Operator Workstations) type.

This defines the points list for proper coordination of interoperability with other

building systems if applicable for this project.





10. Provide LonMark Certification and functional profile SNVT’s for unitary‐level

controllers (i.e. chillers, RTU’s, AHU’s, Terminal VAV boxes, FCU’s, UV’s, etc.) for

interoperability with other building systems if applicable for this project.

E. Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation, submit three (3) copies of record

(as‐built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final

completion and include:

1. Project Record Drawings ‐ These shall be as‐built versions of the submittal shop

drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .dwg and .pdf drawing files shall

be provided.

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists signed off by trained factory

(equipment manufacturers) and field (BAS) commissioning personnel.

3. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals ‐ These shall be as‐built versions of the

submittal product data. In addition to the information required for the submittals,

Operating & Maintenance manual shall include:

a. Names, address and 24‐hour/7‐day per week telephone numbers of

Contractor personnel managing and installing equipment, along with service

personnel responsible for supporting the ongoing warranty and services of

the control system.

b. Procedures for operating the BAS including logging on/off, alarm

management, generation of reports, trends, overrides of computer control,

modification of setpoints, and other interactive system requirements.

c. Description of the programming language including syntax, statement

descriptions, algorithms, calculations, point database creation and

modification, program creation and modification, and operator use of the

editor.

d. Explanation of how to design and install new points, new DDC controllers,

and other BAS hardware.

e. Preventative Maintenance and calibration procedures; hardware

troubleshooting; and hardware repair and/or replacement procedures.





f. Documentation of all software program logic created for Custom

Programmable Controllers including the overall point database. Provide one

set of magnetic media containing files of the software and point database.

g. One set of electronic media containing files of all operator color graphic

screens for the project.

h. A list of recommended spare parts including pricing, manufacturer, supplier,

and part numbers.

i. Documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third party

hardware/software products provided including personal computers,

printers, hubs, sensors, valves, etc.

j. Original issue media for all software provided, including operating systems,

programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics

software.

k. Licenses, Guarantee, and Warranty documents for all equipment and

systems.

l. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system

components including a schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration,

etc.) and task descriptions.

F. Training Manuals: The BAS manufacturer shall provide a course outline and copies of training

manuals at least two weeks prior to the start of any corporate training class to be attended

by the Owner.

1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Warrant all work as follows:

1. BAS system labor and materials shall be warranted free from defects for a period of

twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. BAS failures

during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge to the

Owner. The BAS manufacturer shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty

service within 24 hours of the initiated call and will occur during normal business

hours (8AM‐5PM).





2. At the end of the final start‐up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating

satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying

that the BAS is operational, and has been tested and accepted in accordance with the

terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of the

warranty period.

3. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and

firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty

period. Written authorization by the Owner must be granted prior to the installation

of these updates.

4. The BAS manufacturer shall provide a web‐accessible Users Network for the proposed

System and give the Owner free access to question/answer forum, user tips,

upgrades, and training schedules for a one year period of time correlating with the

warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMUNICATION

A. This project shall be comprised of a high speed Ethernet network utilizing BACnet/IP

communications between System Controllers and Workstations. Communications between

System Controllers and sub‐networks of Custom Application Controllers and/or Application

Specific Controllers shall be as defined below.

1. Each System Controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom

Application and Application Specific Controllers using BACnet/Zigbee (802.15.4) as

defined by the Zigbee Standard.

a. Each communication interface shall be ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135‐2016

(BACnet®/ZigBee®).

b. Each System Controller shall function as a BACnet Router to each unit

controller providing a unique BACnet Device ID for all controllers within the

system.

c. Wireless equipment controllers and auxiliary control devices shall conform to:

1) IEEE 802.15.4 radios to minimize risk of interference and maximize

battery life, reliability, and range.





2) Communication between equipment controllers shall conform to

ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135‐2016 (BACnet®/ZigBee®) standard as

BACnet tunneling devices to accommodate future integration.

3) Operating range shall be a minimum of 200 feet (60 m); open range

shall be 2,500 ft. (762 m) with less than 2% packet error rate.

4) To maintain robust communication, mesh networking and two‐way

communications shall be used to optimize the wireless network health.

5) Wireless communication shall be capable of many‐to‐one sensors per

controller to support averaging, monitoring, and multiple zone

applications.

6) Certifications shall include FCC CFR47 ‐ RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES ‐

Section 15.247 & Subpart E

2.2 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Building operator web interface

1. The building operator web interface shall be accessible via a web browser without

requiring any “plug‐ins” (i.e. JAVA Runtime Environment (JRE), Adobe Flash).

2. User Roles

a. The system shall include pre‐defined “roles” that allow a system

administrator to quickly assign permissions to a user.

b. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded.

c. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging

off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable.

3. On‐Line Help and Training

a. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator in

operation and configuration of the system.





b. On‐line help shall be available for all system functions and shall provide the

relevant data for each particular screen.

4. Equipment & Application Pages

a. The building operator web interface shall include standard pages for all

equipment and applications. These pages shall allow an operator to obtain

information relevant to the operation of the equipment and/or application,

including:

1) Animated Equipment Graphics for each major piece of equipment

and floor plan in the System. This includes:

a) Each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and

Cooling Tower. These graphics shall show all points

dynamically as specified in the points list.

b) Animation capabilities shall include the ability to show a

sequence of images reflecting the position of analog outputs,

such as valve or damper positions. Graphics shall be capable

of launching other web pages.

2) Alarms relevant to the equipment or application without requiring a

user to navigate to an alarm page and perform a filter.

3) Historical Data (As defined in Data Log section below) for the

equipment or application without requiring a user to navigate to a Data

Log page and perform a filter.

5. System Graphics. Building operator web interface shall be graphically based and shall

include at least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone,.

a. Graphic imagery – graphics shall use 3D images for all standard and custom

graphics.

b. Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying different Image

lies for changed object status.

c. Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm condition using

color or other visual indicator.





6. Graphics Library. Furnish a library of standard HVAC equipment such as chillers, air

handlers, terminals, fan coils, unit ventilators, rooftop units, and VAV boxes, in 3‐

dimensional graphic depictions. The library shall be furnished in a file format

compatible with the graphics generation package program.

7. Mobile App Interface

a. The operator interface shall support system access on a mobile device via a

mobile app to:

1) Alarm log

2) System Status

3) Equipment status

4) Space Status

5) Standard Equipment graphics

6) Override set points

7) Override occupancy

8) Acknowledge Alarms

9) Comment on Alarms

8. Manual Control and Override.

a. Point Control. Provide a method for a user to view, override, and edit if

applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. The point

status shall be available by menu, on graphics or through custom programs.

b. Temporary Overrides. The user shall be able to perform a temporary

override wherever an override is allowed, automatically removing the

override after a specified period of time.

c. Override Owners. The system shall convey to the user the owner of each

override for all priorities that an override exists.





d. Provide a specific icon to show timed override or operator override, when a

point, unit controller or application has been overridden manually.

9. Scheduling. ‐ The scheduling application shall provide graphical representation of the

day, week, month and exception events.

10. Alarm/Event Notification

a. Alarm/Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system

alarms/events from any building operator web interface.

1) The operator shall be able to sort and filter alarms from events.

Alarms shall be sorted in a minimum of 4 categories based on severity.

2) Alarm/event messages shall use full language, easily recognized

descriptors.

11. Reports and Logs.

a. The building operator web interface shall provide a reporting package that

allows the operator to select reports.

b. The building operator web interface shall provide the ability to schedule

reports to run at specified intervals of time.

c. The following standard reports shall be available without requiring a user to

manually configure the report:

1) All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all

current alarms.

2) All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing

all overrides in effect.

3) Commissioning Report: Provide a one‐time report that lists all

equipment with the unit configuration and present operation.

4) Points report: Provide a report that lists the current value of all points





5) VAV Air System. An operator shall be able to view and control

(where applicable) the following parameters via the building operator

web interface:

a) System Mode

b) System Occupancy

c) Ventilation (Outdoor air flow) setpoint

d) Ventilation (Outdoor air flow) status

e) Air Handler Static pressure setpoint

f) Air Handler Static pressure status

g) Air Handler occupancy status

h) Air Handler Supply air cooling and heating set points

i) Air Handler minimum, maximum and nominal static pressure

setpoints

j) VAV box minimum and maximum flow

k) VAV box drive open and close overrides

l) VAV box occupancy status

m) VAV box Airflow to space

n) Average space temperature

o) Minimum space temperature

p) Maximum space temperature

B. Wireless Zone Sensors

1. Battery life shall be 15 years or greater to minimize the need for battery replacement

in typical operating conditions.





2. To check for proper operation, wireless space temperature sensors shall include a

signal strength on the space sensor display.

3. To allow local troubleshooting without specialized tools, error codes shall be

displayed on the digital display. Error codes shall include: not associated, address to

000, improper software configuration, input voltage too high, or general sensor

failure. Codes shall be indicated on inside of sensor back cover.

4. To support use by the physically impaired, the wireless space sensor shall be a

minimum font size of 12 points, and the LCD model shall be readable in low light

conditions.

5. An optional 2% relative humidity sensors module shall be available for humidity

control applications to minimize the need for wired sensors, and shall not shorten

typical battery life to less than 15 years.

2.3 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All

software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications

shall occur at the building operator interface.

1. VAV Air Systems Application

a. The BAS shall provide an Air Systems application program that coordinates air

handlers (AHU)/rooftop units (RTU) and Variable Air Volume Terminal

equipment.

b. The Air Systems application shall perform the following functions:

1) Startup and shutdown the air handler safely. Ensure the VAV boxes

are open sufficiently when the air handler is running, to prevent

damage to the ductwork and VAV boxes due to high air pressure.

2) Fan Pressure Optimization (ASHRAE 90.1) ‐ Minimize energy usage by

controlling system static pressure to the lowest level while maintaining

zone airflow requirements. System static pressure controlled to keep

the “most open” zone damper between 65% and 75% open.





3) During commissioning, and with the engineer/owner, the controls

contractor shall confirm the performance of Fan Pressure Optimization

by conducting a field functional test that demonstrates critical zone

reset.

4) Ventilation Optimization (ASHRAE 62) – properly ventilate all spaces

while minimizing operating energy costs, using measured outdoor air

flow. Dynamically calculate the system outdoor air requirement based

on “real time” conditions in the spaces (i.e., number of occupants, CO2

levels, etc.) minimizing the amount of unconditioned outdoor air that

must be brought into the building.

5) Demand Controlled Ventilation – the active ventilation setpoint shall

modulate between the occupied ventilation and occupied standby

ventilation setpoint; Resetting the setpoint based on CO2 levels in the

space.

c. The Air Systems application shall provide a user interface that includes status

of current system operation with real time data of key operating parameters.

Key operating parameters include:

1) Duct Static Pressure

2) Duct Static Optimization Setpoint

3) Outdoor Airflow

4) Ventilation Optimization Setpoint

5) Duct Static Optimization Maximum VAV Damper/Source VAV Box

6) Ventilation Optimization Maximum VAV Vent Ratio/Source VAV box

d. The Air Systems status screens shall explain what optimization calculations

are occurring, critical parameters, and source equipment members. The

optimization status, inputs, and results shall be displayed for VAV Ventilation

Optimization (calculating proper outside air intake) and VAV Duct Static

Pressure Optimization (calculating proper fan static pressure).





e. The Air Systems application shall provide a user interface that enables

configuration changes made by swipe and type fields, selection list, and

check box entry for feature definition:

1) VAV Auxiliary Night Heat

2) VAV Source Temperature Distribution

3) Changeover System control

4) Start/Stop Delay operation

5) Enable/Disable Optimization Strategies (Duct Static Optimization and

Ventilation Optimization)

f. The operation of VAV Terminal equipment members of the VAV Air System

shall be selected by check box to optionally participate in the following

functions:

1) System calculations (min, max, average)

2) Duct Pressure Optimization

3) Ventilation Optimization

4) Drive to Maximum Override

5) Common Source Temperature

6) Common Space

g. The Air Systems application vendor shall provide a published applications

guide that details the air system application operation, configuration, setup,

and troubleshooting. The applications guide documentation shall be

maintained under version control, and updated by the manufacture to

reflect most recent feature updates as made available. Contents of the guide

shall include:

1) Description of System Operation





2) Required Components

3) Sequences of Operation

4) Installation

5) Controller Setup

6) Required Programming

7) Commissioning

8) Optimization Strategies

9) Special Applications

10) Troubleshooting

h. The Variable Air System application shall present in plain user language the

current operation with source zone information and reset events.

2. The following is a list of key measurements required to be trended by the system.

a. Air Systems

Air Handling Unit/Rooftop (VAV)

Discharge Air Temperature

Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Active

Space Temperature Active

Cooling Capacity Status

Discharge Air Flow

Air Handling Unit/Rooftop (CV)

Discharge Air Temperature


Space Temperature Setpoint Active

Cooling Capacity Status

Heating Capacity Primary Status

Outdoor Air Damper Position

VAV Box Discharge Air Temperature






Space Temperature Setpoint Active

Air Flow Setpoint Active

Discharge Air Flow

Variable Air System Duct Static Optimization Duct Static Setpoint

Space Temperature Average

Ventilation Optimization Air Setpoint

Operating Mode

Duct Pressure Optimization Maximum

b. Area Control

Variable Air System Duct Static Optimization Duct Static Setpoint

Space Temperature Average

Ventilation Optimization Air Setpoint

Operating Mode

Duct Pressure Optimization Maximum

2.4 BUILDING / SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be as indicated on the drawings and described

in these specifications. System must be fully integrated and coordinated with mechanical

equipment DDC controllers furnished and installed in the equipment manufacturer’s

factory as specified in those sections.

1. The intent of the BAS is to integrate the mechanical equipment associated with this

project into one system for global monitoring, control, and alarming.

2. All mechanical equipment that is intended to be integrated into the BAS shall be

controlled by Custom Application or Application Specific Controllers that meet the

interface requirements as detailed in the communications section of this specification.

B. Control System Operator Interfaces





1. Touchscreen Display ‐ The Manufacturer shall provide a 10” color touchscreen display

that allows the building occupants to accomplish the following tasks:

a. Control the set points for multiple pieces of equipment with a single touch.

Set point adjustment by the occupant shall be bound by editable limits.

Occupant override of the system/equipment operating mode shall be

possible with a single touch on the touchscreen display.

b. The touchscreen display shall provide occupant access to system schedule.

Occupants shall have the ability to schedule events more than one year in

advance. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the

calendar, visible to the occupant on the touchscreen display.

c. The touchscreen display shall offer PIN control, which shall limit system

control access to only those with proper login credentials.

d. The touchscreen display shall display the alerts that require service of the

connected equipment.

2. Mobile App ‐ The manufacturer shall make available a mobile application that enables

access to the control system. The mobile application shall support shall support the

latest versions of both iOS and Android.

a. The mobile application shall allow the building occupants to accomplish the

following tasks:

1) Control the set points for multiple pieces of equipment with a single

touch.

2) Set point adjustment by the occupant shall be bound by editable limits.

3) Occupant override of the system/equipment operating mode shall be

possible with a single touch.

3. Web UI ‐ The manufacturer shall provide a web browser‐based interface for the

service provider.

a. The service provider interface shall support multiple web browsers and shall

be plug in free (i.e. JAVA Runtime Environment (JRE), Adobe Flash).





b. On‐Line Help and Training ‐ The web browser interface shall provide a context

sensitive, on line help system to assist the servicer in operation and

configuration of the system.

c. The web browser interface shall include graphics pages for all equipment and

system applications. These pages shall allow a servicer to obtain information

relevant to the operation of the equipment and/or application.

d. Manufacturer shall provide the following interface capabilities: Animated

equipment graphics for each piece of equipment, alarm indication for all

equipment and system applications, historical data logs. Data logs shall be

begin recording at system start up.

C. System Communication

1. BACnet/MSTP Communication

a. Each System Controller shall perform communications to a network of

Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers using BACnet/MSTP

(RS485) as defined by the BACnet standard.

2. Wireless Network Communication

a. Each System Controller shall perform communications to a network of

Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers using ANSI/ASHRAE

Standard 135‐2016 (BACnet®/ZigBee®)

b. The controls wireless network shall be capable of similar performance to a

wired, equally quantified network by responding to controls requests within

10% timing comparison to provide a similar user experience for facility

managers and occupants.

c. The controls wireless network shall be secured using Advanced Encryption

Standard AES‐128 (FIPS Pub 197) and HMAC (FIPS Pub 198). A Trust Center

will create a randomly generated 128‐bit network security key for each

ZigBee network.

d. IEEE 802.15.4 radios to minimize risk of interference and maximize battery

life, reliability, and range.





e. Indoor design range shall be a minimum of 200 feet (60 m); open range shall

be 2,500 ft. (762 m) with less than 2% packet error rate to minimize the need

for repeaters and optimize network reliability.

f. To maintain robust communication, self‐healing, redundant mesh networking

and two‐way communications shall be used to optimize the wireless network

reliability.

g. Wireless communication shall be capable of many‐to‐one sensors per

controller to support averaging, monitoring, and multiple zone applications.

h. Space/wall sensors shall be available with batteries with a typical life of 15 or

more years to minimize maintenance costs or with power harvesting

capabilities to minimize the need for batteries.

i. Certifications shall include FCC CFR47 ‐ RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES ‐ Section

15.247 & Subpart E

3. Wireless Zone Sensors

a. To check for proper operation, wireless space temperature sensors shall

include a signal strength on the space sensor display.

b. To allow local troubleshooting without specialized tools, error codes shall be

displayed on the digital display. Error codes shall include: not associated,

address to 000, improper software configuration, input voltage too high, or

general sensor failure. Codes shall be indicated on inside of sensor back

cover.

c. To support use by the physically impaired, the wireless space sensor shall be a

minimum font size of 12 points, and the LCD model shall be readable in low

light conditions.

D. System Controllers

1. There shall be one or more independent, standalone microprocessor based System

Controllers to manage the global strategies.

a. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output

communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and

virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms.





b. Each System Controller shall be listed as a Building Controller (B‐BC) by the

BACnet Test Labs

c. All System Controllers shall have a real time clock.

d. All System Controllers shall be able to accept a BACnet time synchronization

command for automatic time synchronization.

E. Remote Access / Network Security

1. Controls manufacturer shall provide secure remote access to the Building Automation

System (BAS).

a. Secure remote access to the BAS shall be available anywhere, anytime, using

a compatible client device (PC/tablet/phone).

b. Secure remote access to the BAS shall be maintained by controls

manufacturer.

c. Secure remote access to the BAS shall not require additional software to be

installed on the client device (i.e. VPN client).

d. Secure remote access to the BAS shall not require ANY inbound ports on a

firewall to be “exposed” or “forwarded”.

F. System Controller Configuration

1. Software Setup Utility

a. The system shall be capable of being set up from the touchscreen interface.

2. Network Communication and System Setup

a. The unit controllers shall be addressed by methods other than software

settings, such as rotary switches for ease in troubleshooting communication

issues.

b. Communicating Unit controller devices shall be automatically discovered by

the coordinating system panel.

c. Equipment shall be combined to form systems from the local display





3. Scheduling

a. Schedules shall be created from the local display.

b. System and scheduling capabilities shall include optimal start.

4. The manufacturer shall provide a published applications guide that details the air

system application operation, configuration, setup, and troubleshooting.

a. The applications guide shall be maintained under version control and updated

by the manufacture to reflect most recent feature updates when available.

b. Contents of the guide shall include: Description of system operation, required

components, sequences of operation, and installation.

G. VAV Air System Application Software

1. The BAS shall provide an Air Systems application program that coordinates rooftop

units (RTU) and Variable Air Volume Terminal equipment.

2. The Air Systems application shall perform the following functions:

a. Startup and shutdown the air handler safely. Ensure the VAV boxes are open

sufficiently when the air handler is running, to prevent damage to the

ductwork and VAV boxes due to high air pressure.

b. Calibrate VAV boxes to ensure proper air damper/actuator operation.

c. Fan Pressure Optimization (ASHRAE 90.1) ‐ Minimize energy usage by

controlling system static pressure to the lowest level while maintaining zone

airflow requirements. System static pressure controlled to keep the “most

open” zone damper between 65% and 75% open.

d. The Fan Pressure Optimization application shall have the ability to identify

and display the discharge air setpoint of the air‐handler and the VAV box

that serves the critical zone (e.g., the zone with the most open VAV box

damper). This information shall dynamically update with changes in the

location of the critical zone.

e. During commissioning, and with the engineer/owner, the controls contractor

shall confirm the performance of Fan Pressure Optimization by conducting a

field functional test that demonstrates critical zone reset.





f. Enable/Disable Optimization Strategies (Duct Static Optimization and

Ventilation Optimization)

g. The following is a list of the air system points that shall displayed on the

operator touchscreen display.

1) Rooftop Unit – Fan Status

2) Rooftop Unit – Discharge Air Temperature

3) Rooftop Unit – Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Active

4) VAV Air System – Duct Static Pressure (if used in system)

5) VAV Air System – Duct Static Pressure Setpoint (if used in system)

6) VAV Air System – Space Temperature Average (if used in system)

7) VAV Box – Space Temperature Active

8) VAV Box – Space Temperature Setpoint

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WARNING LABELS

A. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all equipment that can be automatically started

by the BAS system.

B. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all motor starters and all control panels that are

connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. All field wiring and cabling, including that within factory mounted, and wired control panels

and devices for mechanical equipment, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination

with a cable identifier and other descriptive information for troubleshooting, maintenance,

and service purposes. BAS manufacturer to coordinate this labeling requirement with

mechanical equipment manufacturer as it relates to controls.

B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item

served and correlate them to the BAS design drawings.

C. Identify control panels with minimum 1‐cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

D. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug‐in components shall be labeled such that

removal of the component does not remove the label.

3.3 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING





A. Start‐up testing. All testing in this section shall be performed by the contractor and shall

make up part of the necessary verification of an operating control system. This testing shall be

completed before the owner’s representative is notified of the system demonstration.

1. The contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and

prepare for service all of the instruments, controls, and accessory equipment

furnished under this specification.

2. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free os all shorts and ground

faults. Verify that terminations are tight.

3. Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices individually.

Perform calibration procedures according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Verify all binary output devices (relays, solenoid valves, two‐position actuators and

control valves, magnetic starter, etc.) operate properly and normal positions are

correct.

5. Verify all analog output devices (I/Ps, actuators, etc) are functional, that startand

span are correct, and that direection and normal positions are correct. The contractor

shall check all control valves and autoatic dampers to ensure proper action and

closure. The contractor shall make any necessary adjustments to valve stem and

damper blade travel.

6. Verify the system operation adheres to the sequences of operation. Simulate and

observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune

all DDC loops and optimal start/stop routimes.

7. Alarms and Interlocks

a. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that

will trip the alarm.

b. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic, as well as to

ensure that the fail‐safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction,

c. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the

initiating value of the variable and interlock action.





3.4 CLEANING

A. Provide The BAS manufacturer’s installing contractor(s) shall clean up all debris resulting from

their installation activities on a daily basis. The installation contractors shall remove all

cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been

removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Owner,

Construction Manager, General Contractor, and/or Mechanical Contractor.

B. At the completion of work in any area, the installation contractor shall clean all of their work,

equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris.

C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for

paint damage. Any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match

the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced

with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.5 TRAINING

A. Provide minimum of (4) classroom training sessions, and (4) hours for each session,

throughout the contract period. The training will be provided for personnel designated by the

Owner.

B. These objectives will be divided into logical groupings; participants may attend one or more

of these, depending on level of knowledge required:

1. Day‐to‐day BAS Operators

2. BAS Troubleshooting & Maintenance

C. Provide course outline and materials prior to schedule training session. The instructor(s) shall

provide one copy of training material per student.

D. The instructor(s) shall be factory‐trained and experienced in teaching this technical material.

END OF SECTION

ΔΔΔΔΔ SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES SITE‐WORK LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, LLC. 32 13 16 ‐ 1/5


SECTION 033519.13 ‐ SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Dry‐shake colored hardener applied to exterior concrete pavements. 2. Rock salt finishing applied to exterior concrete pavements.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast‐in‐Place Concrete" for concrete strength and mix requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 301 ‐ Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 302 IR ‐ Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 3. ACI 303.1 ‐ Standard Specification for Cast‐In‐Place Architectural Concrete. 4. ACI 304 ‐ Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing

of Concrete. 5. ACI 305R ‐ Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 306R ‐ Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 316 ‐ Recommendations for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Bases.

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 494 ‐Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit the manufacturer’s complete technical information sheets.

B. Design Mixes: For each type of concrete.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of

colors available.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit sample application for each special concrete finish

required to verify selections made to demonstrate aesthetic effects.



E. Qualification Data: For color hardener manufacturer.


A. Concrete Contractor Qualifications: Concrete work shall be performed by firm with three years

experience and must have successfully completed not less than 6 projects work of similar scope and quality comparable in scale and complexity.

1. Statement of Contractor Qualifications: Submit list of at least 6 completed

projects including project name, project address and owner contact information.

B. Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency

in workmanship throughout Project.

C. Colored Concrete Mockup:

1. Construct mockup using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent

work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control, construction, and expansion joints in sample panels. Individual workers who will perform the work for the Project will produce mockup.

2. Obtain Architect’s approval of mockup before proceeding with topping installation. 3. Accepted mockup provides visual standard for work of Section. 4. Mockup shall remain through completion of the work for use as a quality standard

for finished work. 5. Remove mockup when directed.


A. Products shall be delivered in original factory packaging, unopened and undamaged.

Packaging will bear identification of product, manufacturer’s identification and batch numbers. A technical information sheet and MSDS should be available for each product throughout the project.

B. Store the product in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations in a location

protected from damage, construction activity, and weather conditions.

1.7 JOB SITE CONDITIONS

A. Protection: Precautions shall be taken to protect surrounding areas and landscaping.

B. Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun

C. Avoid placement if rain, snow, or frost is forecast within a 24‐hour period. Protect fresh

concrete from moisture and freezing.

D. Comply with professional practices described in ACI 305R and ACI 306R.



1.8 PRE‐JOB CONFERENCE

A. One week prior to placement of concrete a meeting shall be held to discuss the Project and application methods.

B. It is suggested that the Landscape Architect, General Contractor, Subcontractor, Ready‐Mix Concrete Representative, and a Manufacturer's Representative be present.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis‐of‐Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lithochrome

Color Hardener dry‐shake colored hardener by L.M. Schoefield or accepted substitution.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Rock salt‐ sifted to remove all materials smaller than 1/8”.

B. Evaporation Retarder if needed shall be as follows:

1. BRICKFORM® Evaporation Retarder, Rafco Product’s factory concentrated

surface retardant or accepted substitution.

2.3 COLORS

A. Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard and custom colors. More

than one color may be selected.

2.4 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Concrete shall be as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast‐in‐Place Concrete.

B. Slump of concrete shall be as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast‐in‐Place Concrete.

C. Do not add calcium chloride to mix as it causes mottling and surface discoloration.

D. Supplemental admixtures shall not be used unless approved by manufacturer.

E. Do not add water to the mix in the field.


3.1 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Move concrete into place with square‐tipped shovels or concrete rakes.



B. Vibrators, when used, shall be inserted and withdrawn vertically.

C. Concrete shall be struck to specified level with wood or magnesium straight edge

or mechanical vibrating screed.

D. The concrete surface shall be further leveled and consolidated with highway

magnesium straight edge and/or magnesium bull float.

E. Mechanically float concrete surfaces as soon as concrete surface has taken its initial set and will support weight of a power float machine equipped with float shoes or combination blades and operator.

3.2 INSTALLATION – DRY‐SHAKE COLORED HARDENER

A. Protect surrounding areas as specified.

B. Apply 2/3 of specified application rate to freshly floated concrete surface. Bleed water shall

not be present during or following application of first and second shake.

C. Do not throw dry‐shake; distribute evenly by hand or mechanical spreader designed to apply

floor hardeners

D. As soon as dry‐shake material has absorbed moisture, indicated by uniform darkening

of surface, mechanically float concrete surface a second time, Using only a wood float, just enough to bring moisture from base slab through dry‐shake color hardener.

E. Immediately following second floating, apply remaining 1/3 of specified application rate.

If applied by hand, broadcast in opposite direction of first application for a more uniform coverage. If a mechanical spreader is used, apply the same manner as previously described.

F. As soon as dry‐shake material has absorbed moisture, mechanically float concrete surface

a third time using only a wood float.

G. Do not add water to the surface.

H. Do not use plastic sheeting to cure the concrete.

I. After the initial curing period, a clear, non‐staining, non‐yellowing curing compound that

conforms to ASTM C 309 may be used.

3.3 APPLICATION OF ROCK SALT

A. Screed, tamp, and float concrete.

B. While concrete is still in a plastic stage, evenly dispense rock salt over surface at the rate of

ten pounds per 150 square feet.



C. Carefully float the rock salt to depress it into concrete. Avoid covering rock salt.

D. Allow concrete to cure and set thoroughly under normal procedures.

E. After seven to ten days, thoroughly wash any remaining salt from the area. Do not

contaminate any adjacent planting areas with salt.

3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that

ensure topping are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

C. Prohibit foot or vehicular traffic on floor surface.

D. Barricade area to protect installation.


ΔΔΔΔΔ PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING SITE‐WORK LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, LLC. 321413 ‐ 1/3


SECTION 321413 – PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete Unit Pavers.


1. Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for base, curbs and edge restraints.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames.

2. Samples for selecting unit pavers.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

2. Mockup Size: 4‐feet by 4 ‐feet.


A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.



B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and contamination avoided.

D. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.

E. Store asphalt cement and other materials in tightly closed containers.


A. Maintenance Data: For maintaining and cleaning to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT PAVERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936/C 936M, made from normal‐weight aggregates.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Keystone Hardscapes. (Basis‐of‐design: Holland Stone) 2. Pavestone Company.

D. Interlocking Paving Units: 1. Thickness: 2‐3/8 inches. 2. Face Size and Shape: 3‐7/8 inches square. 3. Face Size and Shape: 3‐7/8‐by‐7‐7/8‐inch rectangle. 4. Color/Pattern: River Red/Herringbone, as indicated in drawings. 5. Color/Pattern: Charcoal/Soldier, as indicated in drawings

2.2 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS

A. Cast‐in‐place Concrete: As indicated in drawings.

2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING‐BED MATERIALS

A. Sand for Leveling Course: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.

B. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.




3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Proof‐roll prepared subgrade surface and correct deficiencies before installing unit pavers.

B. Cut unit pavers with masonry saw.

C. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16‐inch unit‐to‐unit offset (lippage) nor 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level or indicated slope.

3.2 AGGREGATE SETTING‐BED PAVER INSTALLATION

A. Place sand for leveling course to a thickness of 1/2 to 1‐ inch.

B. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand‐tight against spacer bars.

C. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with at least three passes of a low‐amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500‐ to 5000‐lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.

D. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand.

E. Repeat joint‐filling process 30 days later.

3.3 REPAIRING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: Remove excess sand from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.

1. Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as acceptable to paver and grout manufacturers.

2. Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect, and remove coating material.

C. Protect unit pavers from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period, until Substantial Completion.


FOUNDATION DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES:

THE WEB OF THE METAL BUILDING COLUMN IS CORRODED ANDSHOW SIGNS OF DELAMINATION. REPAIR WEB PER DETAIL 3/S5.2.

A

THE WEB SECTION OF THE METAL BUILDING COLUMN HASCORROSION HOLES AND DELAMINATION. REPAIR WEB PERDETAIL 3/S5.2.

B

THE WEB SECTION OF THE METAL BUILDING COLUMN HASMINOR CORROSION. REPAIR WEB PER DETAIL 10/S5.2.

C

THE BASEPLATE AND ANCHOR RODS ARE EXPOSED. CLEAN,

APPLY RUST-ANODE ® PRIMER, AND PAINT BASEPLATE, ANCHOR

RODS, AND BOTTOM 12" OF METAL BUILDING COLUMN.

D

THE BASEPLATE AND ANCHOR RODS ARE EMBEDDED IN THECONCRETE. EXPOSE BASEPLATE AND ANCHOR RODS PERDETAIL 1/S5.2. REPLACE BASEPLATE, AND REPAIR OR REPLACEANCHOR RODS PER DETAIL 2/S5.2.

E

REMOVE EXISTING COLUMN AND BASEPLATE. REPLACE COLUMNWITH 5" DIA. STD PIPE WITH 3/4" THICK BASEPLATE AND FOUR(4)ANCHOR RODS.

F

REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE DOWN UP TO TOP OF EXISTINGSLAB.

G

REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE SAME SIZE AS PROPOSEDFOOTING IN THAT LOCATION.

H

REMOVE EXISTING COLUMN AND BASEPLATE.I

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4 5

5

6

6

7

7 8

8 9

9

10

10 11 12

12 13

14

15

16

16

AA

BB

CC

DD

EE

FF

GG

HH

II

JJ

KK

LL

MM

I E

E A E

EA D

C D A D

C D

B E

F

F D

D

D

C D

C D

DC

DC

DC

I

F

EB

B E

EA

EB

I I

E

A E

E

A E

I

I

EA

F B E

I

I

I

H

G G

G G

C

C I

C

C

I

H

H

12'-1

0 1/

4"23

'-0 1

/16"

12'-9

11/

16" 1'

-4"

8"23

'-8"

24'-4

"3

1/2"

4 1/

2"25

'-0"

25'-0

"24

'-3 1

/16"

173'

-7 1

/16"

12'-1

0 1/

4"23

'-0 1

/16"

12'-9

11/

16"1'

-4"

8"23

'-8"

24'-4

"3

1/2"

4 1/

2"25

'-0"

25'-0

"24

'-3 1

/16"

173'

-7 1

/16"

1'-2" 23'-10" 25'-0" 25'-0" 25'-0" 8" 24'-4" 11'-6" 12'-4" 1'-10" 14'-3 1/16" 20'-3 7/16" 14'-1 9/16"

199'-4"

1'-2" 23'-10" 25'-0" 25'-0" 25'-0" 8" 24'-4" 11'-6" 12'-4"

1'-6 1/2"

3 1/2" 24'-4" 24'-4"

199'-4"

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H H H H

H

H

H

HH

H H H

H

H H I

2

5

T

E

E

R

W.R.HINOJOSA

P

FOET

S

TA

65228

L

TEG

IS

E

N

SI

O A

R

F

O

E

R

S

R

EAS

X

E

I N

G

ED

N

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G, I

NC

.H

INO

JO

SA

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

108 W

. 18T

H S

T.

MIS

SIO

N ,

TE

XA

S(9

56)

581-0

143

F

AX

:(956)

581-2

071

E-M

AIL

: H

inojo

saE

ng

Inc@

aol.com

RE

GIS

TRA

TIO

N N

UM

BE

R F

908

E

XP

IRA

TIO

N D

ATE

09/

30/2

018

COPYRIGHT ROFA ARCHITECTS 2018

CONSULTANTS:

Rike • Ogden • Figueroa • Allex

McAllen Harlingen

McAllen1007 Walnut Ave.

McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO: 17-147

DATE: 08/08/2018

DWN BY: MRCK BY: AT, RH

STARTING DATE:

S2.1

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

ED

INB

UR

G,

TE

XA

S

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

PARTIALFOUNDATIONDEMOLITION PLAN -MAIN BUILDING

3/32" = 1'-0"1

PARTIAL FOUNDATIONDEMOLITION PLAN - MAIN BUILDING

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

207-2

5-2

018

Addendum

No.

2

508-0

8-2

018

Addendum

No.

5

ROOF COMPONENT AND CLADDINGGROSS WIND UPLIFT PRESSURES

ROOF ZONETRIBUTARY AREA

10 SF. 20 SF. 50 SF.

#1

#2

#3

INTERM.

EDGE

CORNER

GCp(+) GCp(-)

17.6 -43.3

17.6 -72.7

17.6 -109.4

GCp(+) GCp(-)

16.5 -42.2

16.5 -64.9

16.5 -90.6

GCp(+) GCp(-)

15.1 -40.7

15.1 -54.7

15.1 -65.8

(-) INDICATES AN UPWARD DIRECTION

*WIND PRESSURES SHOWN ARE GROSS VALUES USING LOAD

RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)

*NET UPLIFT IS THE GROSS UPLIFT MINUS THE ALLOWABLE PORTION

OF DEAD LOAD INCLUDING THE WEIGHT OF THE JOIST.

*EDGE DISTANCE ("a") = 10 FT.

*ALLOWABLE PORTION OF DEAD LOAD TO BE SUBTRACTED FROM

GROSS UPLIFT= 5 PSF.

*ULTIMATE DESIGN WIND SPEED= 140 MPH.

1. DOORS & WINDOWS MAXIMUM DESIGN WIND PRESSURES:

P(+)= +44 TOWARDS THE SURFACE.

P(-)= -58 AWAY FROM THE SURFACE.

2. THE STRUCTURE IS DESIGNED TO MEET ASCE 7-10 WIND

PRESSURES. ALL COMPONENTS AND CLADDING (Ex. WINDOWS,

DOORS, RTU'S AND ARCHITECTURAL COPING AND ROOFING

MATERIALS); SHALL MEET MINIMUM CODE REQUIREMENTS.

A

A

B

B

C

C

D

D

F

F

G

G

H

H

J

J

1 1

3 3

5 5

E

E

W14X22 (HI) W14X22 (HI) W14X22 W14X22 W14X22 (HI) W14X22 (HI)

W14X22 W21X44 W21X44 W21X44 W21X44 W21X44 W21X44 W21X44

W14

X22

W14

X22

2'-4 1/4"

5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0"

2'-4 1/4"

2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 2'-6" 2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 2'-6" 2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 2'-6" 2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 2'-6" 2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 2'-6" 2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 2'-6"

2'-4 1/4"

5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0"

2'-4 1/4"

CANOPY PER ARCHITECTURAL

T.O.S.=16'-0"

T.O

.S.=

115'

-0"

T.O.S.=14'-0"

A.3 I

D.6 E.6

44

249'-5"

15'-8 1/2" 14'-0" 16'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0" 14'-0" 8'-0" 14'-0" 8'-0" 12'-9" 14'-0" 12'-11 1/2"

249'-5"

14'-8 1/2" 15'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 25'-0" 14'-8 1/2"

14'-8

1/2

"15

'-0"

15'-0

"14

'-8 1

/2"

14'-8

1/2

"15

'-0"

15'-0

"14

'-8 1

/2"

HSS6X6X

3/8

HSS6X6X

3/8

HSS6X6X

3/8HSS6X6X3/8

HSS6X6X3/8

HSS6X6X3/8








1S6.1

2S6.1

8S6.1

4S6.1

6S6.1

A.6 B.6 C.6 F.6 G.3 H.6 I.3

11S6.1

K-FRAME PER DETAIL

11/S6.1, TYP.

HSS12X6X1/4 (LO) HSS12X6X1/4 (LO) HSS12X6X1/4 (LO) HSS12X6X1/4 (LO) HSS12X6X1/4 (LO) HSS12X6X1/4 (LO) HSS12X6X1/4 (LO) HSS12X6X1/4 (LO)

HSS6X6X3/8

W14

X22

18K

418

K4

ME

TA

L D

EC

K P

ER

G

EN

ER

AL

NO

TE

S

G.7

HSS6X6X3/8

W14X22 W14X22

59'-5

"

59'-5

"

22

W14

X22

W14X22 (HI) W14X22 (HI)

32G6N7.75K 32G6N6.75K 32G6N6.75K 32G6N6.75K 32G6N6.75K 32G6N6.75K 32G6N6.75K 32G8N6.75K

6S6.1

W14

X22

W14

X22

W14

X22

W14

X22

TYP.

C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C.

C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L

.C.

C.L.C.

K-FRAME. REF DETAIL 11/S6.1, TYP.

W14X22 W14X22

18S6.1

W18

X40

W18

X40

SLO

PE

PE

R A

RC

H'L

DW

GS

20S6.1

C.L.C. C.L.C.C.L.C.C.L.C.C.L.C.C.L.C.C.L.C. C.L.C.C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C. C.L.C.

1S5.4

4S5.4

3S5.4

2S5.4

W14X22 (HI)

HSS12X6X1/4 (LO)

W14X22 (HI)

HSS12X6X1/4 (LO)

W14X22 (HI) W14X22 (HI)

HSS12X6X1/4 (LO)

W14X22 W14X22 (HI) W14X22 (HI) W14X22

8AS6.1

HSS6X6X

3/8

3S6.1

2

2

2

2 2 2 2 2 2

2

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

RT

U M

AX

. W

EIG

HT

16

50 L

BS

.

5

19S6.1

5

SEE ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PLAN FOR ROOF HATCHES.

AND BRIDGING SIZE, AS REQUIRED BY SJI.

JOIST MANUFACTURER TO VERIFY THE MINIMUM ROW OF BRIDGING6.

FOR TYPICAL DETAILS SEE SHEET S1.3.

FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE SHEET S1.1 & S1.2.

3.

2.

1.

ALL STEEL COLUMN SHALL BE HSS 6X6X1/4 U.N.O. ON PLANS.8.

4.

5.

COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS.

DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION.

COORDINATE OPENINGS WITH MECHANICAL PLANS.

JOIST FOR 1/600. (MECHANICAL WEIGHT+DEAD LOAD ONLY)

JOIST SIZE (MAX. JOIST DEPTH TO BE AS SHOWN ON PLANS) DESIGN

AND DESIGN CRITERIA. STEEL JOIST MANUFACTURER TO PROVIDE STEEL

DESIGN JOISTS UNDER UNITS WITH LOADS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS

FOR OPENING IN ROOF AND AT MECHANICAL UNITS, SEE DETAIL:9.

STEEL BEAM TO STEEL COLUMN CONNECTION PER DETAIL:7.

20 S1.3

15 S1.3

FRAMING NOTES

JOIST GIRDERS INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL RTU LOAD ALREADY.10. 2

2

3

1

3 3

3

2

2

2

10'-0"

10'-0

"10

'-0"

10'-0"

10'-0

"10

'-0"

10'-0" 10'-0"

T

E

E

R

W.R.HINOJOSA

P

FOET

S

TA

65228

L

TEG

IS

E

N

SI

O A

R

F

O

E

R

S

R

EAS

X

E

I N

G

ED

N

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G, I

NC

.H

INO

JO

SA

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

108 W

. 18T

H S

T.

MIS

SIO

N ,

TE

XA

S(9

56)

581-0

143

F

AX

:(956)

581-2

071

E-M

AIL

: H

inojo

saE

ng

Inc@

aol.com

RE

GIS

TRA

TIO

N N

UM

BE

R F

908

E

XP

IRA

TIO

N D

ATE

09/

30/2

018


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen



A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO: 17-147

DATE: 08/08/2018


STARTING DATE:

S4.3

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

ED

INB

UR

G,

TE

XA

S

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

FRAMING PLAN -COMMERCIALBUILDING

3/32" = 1'-0"1

FRAMING PLAN -COMMERCIAL BUILDING

2WIND LOAD ZONE DIAGRAMS

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

207-2

5-2

018

Addendum

No.

2

508-0

8-2

018

Addendum

No.

5

DELEGATED COLD-FORM STEEL FRAMING DESIGN

SLAB & REINF'G PER PLAN

COMPACTED SELECT FILL

VAPOR RETARDANT

#3 STIRRUPS AT 18" O.C.

(2)#7 CONT. (T) & (B)

CLR.

3"

CLR.

3"

1'-4"

CLR

.

3"

3'-0

"

4"

8"

3'-0

"

CLR

.

3"

CLR.

3"

CLR.

3"

1'-4"



5'-0" 24" LAP

4"

3"

CLR.

3"

CLR.

3"

3'-0

"


1'-4"

FUTURE SLAB & REINF'G

8"

CLR

.

3"

2'-4

"

CLR

.

3"

CLR.

3"

CLR.

3"

1'-4"

#4 AT EACH SLAB STEEL


ALTERNATE DIRECTION


1'-4"

CLR.

3"

CLR

.

3"

3'-0

"


CLR.

3"

24" LAP

24" LAP 5'-0" 24" LAP

3'-0

"

CLR

.

3"

1'-4"

CLR.

3"



CLR.

3"

COLUMN PER PLAN


8"

GRID

CONTINUE CAGE REINF'G THRU

REINF'G PER SCHEDULE

PLATE PER DETAIL 12/S1.3

CENTER FOOTING AT CENTERLINE OF COLUMN

SIZE PER FOOTING SCHEDULE

DE

PT

H P

ER

FO

OT

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE

NOTES:1. D= FOOTING BELOW FINISH FLOOR.2. FOOTING DIMENSIONS ARE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. ACTUAL DIMENSION MAY VARY.3. PROVIDE UNIT PRICES (ON A CUBIC YARD BASIS) FOR REINFORCED (#5'S @ 12" O.C. E.W. TOP &

BOTT.) WIDENED BEAM CONCRETE FOOTINGS.

CONCRETE BEAM

TYPE "T"

DIA.

A

D

TYPE "P"

CONCRETE BEAM

A

A

TYPE "S"

CONCRETE BEAM

B

C

B

C

CONCRETE BEAM

TYPE "C"

WIDENED BEAM FOOTINGS

FOOTING SCHEDULETYPE A B C D REINFORCING

S3 3'-0" 3'-0" #5'S @ 10" O.C. E.W. TOP & BOTT.

S3A 3'-6" 3'-0" #5'S @ 10" O.C. E.W. TOP & BOTT.

S4 4'-0" 3'-0" #5'S @ 10" O.C. E.W. TOP & BOTT.

S4A 4'-6" 3'-0" #5'S @ 10" O.C. E.W. TOP & BOTT.

S5 5'-0" 3'-0" #5'S @ 10" O.C. E.W. TOP & BOTT.

S2 2'-0" 3'-0" #5'S @ 10" O.C. E.W. TOP & BOTT.

5

12S5.1

29' - 9 1/8"

2

1'-6

"

CLR

.

3"8"

CLR

.

3"

CLR.

3"

CLR.

3"

3'-6"

ALTERNATE HOOK

CMU WALL PER ARCH'L DWG'S

2

#5 AT 10" O.C. EA. WAYTOP & BOTTOM

5

12'-9

1/2

"

25'-5 1/2"

5" THK. SLAB ON GRADEw/ #4 AT 12" O.C. E.W. ATMID-DEPTH OF SLABOVER 15 MIL STEGOWRAP OVER APPROVEDCOMPACTED FILL

14S5.1

16S5.1

5

14S5.1

14S5.1

S2 S2 S2 S2

2% S

LOP

E


8"

SLOPE

4"

3'-0

"

CLR

.

3"

CLR.

3"

CLR.

3"

1'-0"

5


COMPACTED SELECT FILL

VAPOR RETARDANT

#3 STIRRUPS AT 18" O.C.

(2)#7 CONT. (T) & (B)

8"

4"

CMU WALL PER ARCH'L DWG'S

3'-0

"

CLR

.

3"

CLR.

3"

CLR.

3"

1'-0"

5

T

E

E

R

W.R.HINOJOSA

P

FOET

S

TA

65228

L

TEG

IS

E

N

SI

O A

R

F

O

E

R

S

R

EAS

X

E

I N

G

ED

N

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G, I

NC

.H

INO

JO

SA

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

108 W

. 18T

H S

T.

MIS

SIO

N ,

TE

XA

S(9

56)

581-0

143

F

AX

:(956)

581-2

071

E-M

AIL

: H

inojo

saE

ng

Inc@

aol.com

RE

GIS

TRA

TIO

N N

UM

BE

R F

908

E

XP

IRA

TIO

N D

ATE

09/

30/2

018


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen



A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO: 17-147

DATE: 08/08/2018


STARTING DATE:

S5.1

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

ED

INB

UR

G,

TE

XA

S

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

STRUCTURALFOUNDATIONDETAILS

1 EXTERIOR GRADE BEAM



FOR ADDITIONALINFO SEE DETAIL

1S5.1

4 INTERIOR GRADE BEAM


1S5.1


1S5.1



8 COLUMN TO FOOTING


1S5.1


1S5.1


1S5.120 FOOTING SCHEDULE

17 MONUMENTAL SIGN FOUNDATION PLAN

12 FOUNDATION SECTION DETAIL

18 DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE FOUNDATION PLAN



RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

207-2

5-2

018

Addendum

No.

2

508-0

8-2

018

Addendum

No.

5

CUT EXPOSED EXISTING SLAB REINFORCEMENT AT MID-POINT AND BEND EXISTING SLAB REINF'G TO ALLOW WORK TO BE DONE. BEND EXISTING REINFORCEMENT BACK AFTER WORK HAS BEEN DONE AND PLACE NEW REINF'G.

EXISTING SLAB TO REMAIN

SAW-CUT INTO EXISTING FOUNDATION. DO NOT CUT EXISTING SLAB REINFORCEMENT

FILL MATERIAL TO PROVIDE PROPER COMPACTION

EXISTING REINF'G TO REMAIN

GRID

COLUMN BY METAL BUILDING SYSTEM SUPPLIER. DEPTH AND SIZE OF ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM SUPPLIER. DEPTH SHALL BE SUFFICIENT TO PREVENT CONICAL SHEAR FAILURE OF THE CONCRETE

CENTER FOOTING TO COLUMN


DE

PT

H P

ER

FO

OT

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE

2

1 1/

2"

DE

PT

H P

ER

FO

OT

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE

CUT EXPOSED EXISTING SLAB REINFORCEMENT AT MID-POINT AND BEND EXISTING SLAB REINF'G TO ALLOW WORK TO BE DONE. BEND EXISTING REINFORCEMENT BACK AFTER WORK HAS BEEN DONE AND PLACE NEW REINF'G.

EXISTING SLAB TO REMAIN

SAW-CUT INTO EXISTING FOUNDATION. DO NOT CUT EXISTING SLAB REINFORCEMENT

EXISTING REINF'G TO REMAIN


CONTINUE GRADE BEAM REINF'G

1/2" THK. X 3" X 0'-3" PL. TACK WELDED TO ROD

REINF'G PER SCHEDULE

1-1/2" NON-SHRINK GROUT

GRID

CLR

.

3"



2

DE

PT

H P

ER

FO

OT

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE



5/16" THK. PLATE

BRACE

3/4" THK. BASE PLATE w/ (6) 3/4" DIA. X 12" LONG WELDED NELSON STUDS

2

DE

PT

H P

ER

FO

OT

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE




2

EXISTING METAL BUILDING COLUMN WEBS

EXISTING BASEPLATE

EXISTING ANCHOR RODS

12"

EXISTING METAL BUILDING COLUMN

EXISTING FOUNDATION

REMOVE PAINT COATING AND ANY RUST FROM EXISTING STEEL COLUMN UP TO 1'-0" ABOVE BASEPLATE. PROVIDE RUST-ANODE® PRIMER AT BASEPLATE AND BOTTOM 1'-0" OF COLUMN. REPAINT AFFECTED AREA.

2

11S5.2

GRID

GRID

REINFORCING AS REQUIRED BY METAL BUILDING MANUF.

EXISTING METAL BUILDING COL.

REINFORCING AS REQUIRED BY METAL BUILDING MANUF.

2

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN

OUTRIGGER PER METAL BUILDING SYSTEM SUPPLIER

EAVE STRUT PER METAL BUILDING SUPPLIER

ROOF PANEL PER ARCH'L

T.O.S.=PER PLAN

GRID

2

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN


T.O.S.=PER PLAN

PURLING PER METAL BUILDING SUPPLIER

2

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN

METAL DECK PER GENERAL NOTES

T.O.S.=PER PLAN

PURLING PER METAL BUILDING SUPPLIER

EAVE STRUT PER METAL BUILDING SUPPLIER

CONT. L2X2X1/4

2


EXISTING METAL BUILDING COLUMN WEBS

EXISTING BASEPLATE

EXISTING ANCHOR RODS

12"

EXISTING METAL BUILDING COLUMN

PLATE ON BOTH SIDE OF WEB. SAME THICKNESS AS EXISTING WEB

2

11S5.2

2

EXISTING ANCHOR BOLTS:A.) REMOVE THE NUTS AND SANDBLAST (TO REMOVE ALL EXFOLIATED STEEL) THE BOLT THREADS. CHASE THE THREADS ON THE BOLTS WITH A THREADING DIE. CONTACT THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR INSPECTION. AFTER INSPECTION, ENGINEER OF RECORD WILL RECOMMEND THE FOLLOWING:

a.) IF BOLT THREADS ARE STILL RELATIVELY INTACT, INSTALL NEW NUTS AND TIGHTEN THEM.b.) IF THE BOLT THREAD SECTION IS REDUCED DUE TO CORROSION AND CAN’T BE RESTORED, THEN WELD A MILD STEEL BLOCK OVER THE BOLTS IN LIEU OF REPLACING THEM. THE STEEL BLOCK SHOULD HAVE A TAPERED HOLE THAT WOULD ALLOW A BETTER AND DEEPER PENETRATION WELD TO HOLD THE BOLT.c.) IF BOLT THREAD SECTION IS REDUCED DUE TO CORROSION AND CAN’T BE RESTORED, THEN REPLACE ANCHOR RODS WITH (4) 3/4” DIAMETER X 1’-9” ASTM F1554 GRADE 36 ANCHOR RODS. EPOOXY INTO EXISTING CONCRETE WITH SIMPSON SET-XP EPOXY.

APPLY EPOXY COATING (CARBOMASTIC 15) TO SANDBLAST SURFACES, NEW BASEPLATE, REPAIRED FLANGE, AND REPAIRED WEB.

5

EXISTING COLUMN WEB

4000 PSI NON-SHRINK GROUT

ANCHOR RODS: REFER TO DETAIL 15/S5.2

EXISTING COLUMN

NEW BASEPLATE SAME THICKNESS AND SIZE AS EXISTING BASEPLATE

FULL PEN

11S5.2

2

6"18

"

NEW COLUMN FLANGE SAME THICKNESS AND SIZE AS EXISTING FLANGE

NEW COLUMN FLANGE SAME THICKNESS AND SIZE AS EXISTING FLANGE

5

3"

EXISTING COLUMN WEB TO BE REINFORCED PER DETAIL 3/S5.2

EXISTING COLUMN FLANGE

CHIP/REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE AROUND AND UNDER EXISING COLUMN BASEPLATE

EXISTING FOUNDATION

2"

EXISTING ANCHOR RODS TO BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED PER DETAIL 2/S5.2

11S5.2

2

6"

EXISTING COLUMN BASEPLATE TO BE REMOVED

EXISTING COLUMN WEB TO BE REINFORCED PER DETAIL 3/S5.2

EXISTING COLUMN FLANGE TO BE REPAIRED PER DETAIL 2/S5.2

EXISTING COLUMN WEB

EXISTING COLUMN FLANGE

5

T

E

E

R

W.R.HINOJOSA

P

FOET

S

TA

65228

L

TEG

IS

E

N

SI

O A

R

F

O

E

R

S

R

EAS

X

E

I N

G

ED

N

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G, I

NC

.H

INO

JO

SA

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

108 W

. 18T

H S

T.

MIS

SIO

N ,

TE

XA

S(9

56)

581-0

143

F

AX

:(956)

581-2

071

E-M

AIL

: H

inojo

saE

ng

Inc@

aol.com

RE

GIS

TRA

TIO

N N

UM

BE

R F

908

E

XP

IRA

TIO

N D

ATE

09/

30/2

018


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen



A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO: 17-147

DATE: 08/08/2018


STARTING DATE:

S5.2

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

ED

INB

UR

G,

TE

XA

S

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

STRUCTURALFOUNDATIONDETAILS

8 INTERIOR MBS COLUMN DETAIL

9 TYPICAL EXTERIOR MBS DETAIL

6 INTERIOR MBS COLUMN DETAIL

7 TYPICAL INTERIOR MBS COLUMN DETAIL


8S5.2


8S5.2

10 EXISTING COLUMN REPAIR

11 FRAMING SECTION DETAIL




3 EXISTING COLUMN WEB REPAIR15 REPAIR OR REPLACE ANCHOR RODS NOTES

2 FOUNDATION SECTION DETAIL

1 EXISTING COLUMN BASE CONCRETE REPAIR

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

207-2

5-2

018

Addendum

No.

2

508-0

8-2

018

Addendum

No.

5

TYP.

3"

1 1/2"

1" CLR. 1" CLR.

METAL DECK PER PLAN

GIRDER TRUSS PER PLAN, TYP.

1" CAP PL. w/ (4) 3/4" DIA. A325N

TYP.

1/4TYP.

NO WELD

STABILIZER PLATES 3/4"X6" SQ.

COLUMN PER PLAN

GRID

T.O.S.=PER PLAN

METAL DECK PER PLAN3/16 2 1/2" GRID

STEEL JOIST PER PLAN

STEEL JOIST GIRDER PER PLAN

GRID

METAL DECK PER PLAN

CONT. L3X3X1/4

GIRDER TRUSS PER PLAN

C4X5.4 AT 4'-0" O.C.

T.O.S.=PER PLAN

STELL COLUMN PER PLAN

30°

METAL DECK PER PLAN

GRID

L3X3X3/16 BETWEEN JOIST, WELDED TO JOIST

CONT. L3X3X1/4

C4X5.4 AT 4'-0" O.C.


L3X3X3/16 AT 4'-0" O.C. MAX

4"X4"X3/16" THK. PLATE, SHOP WELDED, TYP.

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN


SLOPE

T.O.S.=PER PLAN

T.O.P.=PER PLAN

CONT. HSS6X4X3/8 AT 8/S6.1CONT. HSS6X3X3/8 AT 8A/S6.1

METAL DECK PER PLAN

CONT. L3X3X1/4

METAL STUD CLIP PER METAL STUD WALL SYSTEM MANUF.


STEEL BEAM PER PLAN

SLOPE

T.O.S.=PER PLAN

GRID

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN

CO

LUM

N P

ER

PLA

N

CO

LUM

N P

ER

PLA

N

HS

S5X

3X1/

4 HS

S5X

3X1/4

S6.1

13

S6.1

14

GRID

T.O.S.=PER VARIES

METAL DECK PER PLAN

CONT. L3X3X1/4

C4X5.4 AT 4'-0"


STEEL BEAM PER PLAN


T.O.P.=REF ARCH'L

30°

CONT. HSS6X3X3/8


6"

1"

1" 1"

1"

1/4

1/4" THK. WEB STIFFENER EA. SIDE, TYP.

BEAM PER PLAN

CL. OF BEAM

5/16" THK. PLATE

BRACE

3" 3"

5/16" THK. PLATE

BRACE

3/4" THK. BASE PLATE w/ (6) 3/4" DIA. X 12" LONG WELDED NELSON STUDS

X X

SECTION X-X-

GRID

GRID

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN

STEEL COLUMN PER PLAN BEYOND

PRE-ENGINEERED/PRE-MANUF. CANOPY AND CONNECTIONS BY OTHERS

T.O.BM.11'-0"

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN


GRID METAL DECK PER PLAN


1" THK. PL. w/ (2) 3/4" DIA. A325N

1/4TYP.

NO WELD

STABILIZER PLATES 3/4"X6" SQ.

COLUMN PER PLAN

1/4" THK. PLATE

A

A

GRID METAL DECK PER PLAN


STEEL BEAM PER PLAN

1/4" THK. PLATE

STEEL COULMN PER PLAN

SECTION A-A

3" 3"

L2X2X1/4X12" LONG EACH SIDE OF BEAM

5

5

5

GRID

METAL DECK PER PLAN


L3X3X3/16

1/4" THK. STIFFENER PLATE

STEEL BEAM PER PLAN

GRID GRIDX-X5

48" MINIMUM WIDTH CLEARANCE FOR HVAC DUCTWAY SUPPLY AND RETURN



X-X

T

E

E

R

W.R.HINOJOSA

P

FOET

S

TA

65228

L

TEG

IS

E

N

SI

O A

R

F

O

E

R

S

R

EAS

X

E

I N

G

ED

N

EN

GIN

EE

RIN

G, I

NC

.H

INO

JO

SA

ST

RU

CT

UR

AL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

CIV

IL E

NG

INE

ER

ING

108 W

. 18T

H S

T.

MIS

SIO

N ,

TE

XA

S(9

56)

581-0

143

F

AX

:(956)

581-2

071

E-M

AIL

: H

inojo

saE

ng

Inc@

aol.com

RE

GIS

TRA

TIO

N N

UM

BE

R F

908

E

XP

IRA

TIO

N D

ATE

09/

30/2

018


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen



A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO: 17-147

DATE: 08/08/2018


STARTING DATE:

S6.1

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

ED

INB

UR

G,

TE

XA

S

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

STRUCTURALFRAMING DETAILS

1 TYPICAL GIRDER TO COULMN CONNX.

2 TYP. STEEL JOIST TO JOIST GIRDER

3 JOIST GIRDER TO COLUMN

8 STEEL JOIST TO STEEL BEAM 4 STEEL JOIST TO STEEL BEAM12 K-FRAME ELEVATION

6 JOIST GIRDER TO COLUMN

13 BRACE TO BEAM CONNECTION

14 COLUMN TO BRACE CONNECTION

11 STEEL JOIST TO STEEL BEAM

18 GIRDER TO COULMN CONNX.


19 TYP. GIRDER TRUSS ELEVATION DETAIL

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

508-0

8-2

018

Addendum

No.

5

24"SS

LOT 2

DELTA = 02°27'15"LENGHT = 163.61'RADIUS = 3819.72'TANGENT = 81.82'CHORD = 163.60N 10°12'38" W

S14°54'42"W45.09'

DELTA = 08°49'09"LENGHT = 182.93'RADIUS = 270.00'TANGENT = 95.13'CHORD = 179.45'S 79°42'26" W

60' R.O.W.

41' B/B9.5'9.5'

41' B

/B13

.5'

LOT 1TROPICAL TEXAS CENTER(VOL. 50, PG. 126, H.C.M.R.)

LOT 14

SECTION 270

TEX-MEX RAILWAY COMPANY SURVEY

U.S. HWY.281

"I"

ROAD

IOWA

ROAD

F.F.=96.90

N32°3

6'43"

W

997.8

7'

S08°59'00"W 782.02'

S80

°53'

00"E

526

.23'

RENOVATION

23

SPACES

29

SPACES

133SPACES

COMMERCIAL B

LDG.

TROPICAL TEXAS BLDG.WAREHOUSE

WAREHOUSE

50'X64'

EXISTING DRIVE

6' SIDEWALK

GREEN AREA

GREEN AREA

GREEN AREA

GREEN AREA

GR

EE

N A

RE

A

EXISTING SIDEWALK12' X 24'DUMPSTERSPER CITY OFEDINBURGSTANDARD

20' -

0"

5' SIDEWALK

FUTURE 10'DRIVE THRU

5' EXISTING

5' NEW

5' SID

EWALK

NEW PARKING LOT

NEW P

ARKING

LOT

NEW P

ARKING

LOT

NEW P

ARKING

LOT

4' SIDEWALK

GREENAREA30

' - 0"

30' - 0"

PHASE-I

(PHASE-II)14

' - 8"

60' X 250'

1

1

AS1.21

HCP. SIG

N

REFERCIV

IL D

WGS.

AS1.23

2

2

2

2 2

AS1.27

3

TEMPORARY FENCE

TEMPORARY FENCETEMPORARY GATE

TE

MP

OR

AR

Y

GA

TE

S

4

4

AS1.22C


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/8/2018 2:50:48 PM

AS1.1

MM VDV

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

ARCHITECTURAL SITEPLAN

N

1" = 60'-0" 1ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

17

/20/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

No.

12

7/2

5/20

18A

DD

EM

DU

M N

o.2

38

/1/2

018

AD

DE

MD

UM

No.

44

8/0

8/20

18A

DD

EM

DU

M N

o.5

FOOTING

ROUND-OFF CONCRETEAT TOP

6" DIA. STEEL PIPEFILLED WITH CONCRETEAND PAINTED

FINISHED GRADE

12" DIA. ROUND CONC.

1'-0"

2'-6

"3'

-6"

2"

2' -

6"

3' -

0"

3' -

0"

3' -

0"

2' -

6"

6" Ø PIPE BOLLARFILLED WITH CONCRETE W/ HCP. SIGN REFER 2A/AS1.1

36" HT. 6" Ø PIPEFILLED W/ CONCRETE

WHEELSTOP

WHEELSTOP

WHEELSTOP

WHEELSTOP

WHEELSTOP

6' - 0" 6' - 0"

6"

STANDARDHANDICAP SIGNAPPROVED BY CITY

1-1/2" SCHEDULE 40GALVANIZED PIPE

IF SIGNS IS INSIDEWALK INSTALL1/2" EXPAN. JOINTALL AROUND

3000 PSI CONCRETE FOOTING BY PAVING CONTRACTOR

SET PIPE ON PARTOF A BRICK

RESERVED

RESERVED

2' -

2" (+

/-)1/

2" S

LOP

E

2 1/

4" (+

/-)7'

-6"

HE

IGH

T

2 1/

4"

VAN-ACCESSIBLE

12" X 6" SIGN APPROVED BY CITY VERIFY LOCATION WITH SITE PLAN MIN. ONE AT EACH ACCESSIBLE PARKING

5'-0

" H

EIG

HT

36" HT. 6" Ø PIPE BOLLARFILLED WITH CONCRETE W/ ADA SIGN

3'-0

" H

EIG

HT

6"

8" 24' - 0" 8"

8"12

' - 0

"

8"12

' - 0

"

25' - 4"

12' -

8"

12' -

8"

6' - 0" 11' - 10" 6' - 0"

5"

42" HT. 6" Ø PIPE BOLLARDFILLED WITH CONCRETE REFER 2B/AS1.2

DUMPSTERSNOT IN CONTRACT

( 2 ) 14'-4" CHAINLINK GATES

AS1.2

4

4' - 0"4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0"

8" CMU W/ 3/4" STUCCO,BOTH SIDES,TYP.

42" HT. 6" Ø PIPE BOLLARDFILLED WITH CONCRETEREFER 2B/AS1.2

42" HT. 6" Ø PIPE BOLLARDFILLED WITH CONCRETEREFER 2B/AS1.2

SLOPE2% MAX.

AS1.25

AS1.2

6

AS1.2 5

5" 5"

11

AS1.2

8" 24' - 0" 8"

25' - 4"

8' -

8"

8" CMU BLOCK W/3/4" STUCCO BOTHSIDES, COLOR BYARCHITECT

( 4 ) 6' X 8' HT. CHAINLIK GATES

8' -

0"

42" HT. 6" Ø PIPEFILLED W/ CONCRETEREFER 2B/AS1.2

4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0"

3' -

6"

3

12' - 8"

8" CMU BLOCK W/3/4" STUCCO BOTHSIDES, COLOR AS SPEC.

42" HT. 6" Ø PIPEFILLED W/ CONCRETEREFER 2B/AS1.2

11

AS1.2

8' -

8"

3

8' -

8"

25' - 4"

8" CMU BLOCK W/3/4" STUCCO BOTHSIDES, COLOR AS SPEC.

FOUNDATION REFER. STRUCTURALDWGS.

3

AS1.2

8

AS1.2

9

30' - 0"

1' -

0"1'

- 1

1/8"

1' -

0"

12" CMU W/ FRONTMETAL PANEL ON CMU &REAR 3/4" STUCCO,WITH INTEGRAL COLOR ONGALV. METAL LATH

FOUNDATIONREFER STRUCTURALDWGS.

RADIUM = 100'

1' -

2"

10

AS1.2

(18) 12" HT. X 2" DEEP TYP. LETTER ALUMINUMANODIZED

(1) 18" HT. X 2" DEEP LETTER ALUMINUMANODIZED, AS SPEC.

2' - 0" 2' - 0"

2

2

B

10

AS1.2

A

METAL PANELON CMU

STUCCO ONCMU

6"5'

- 0"

6' -

0"


(18) 12" HT. X 2" DEEP TYP. LETTER ALUMINUMANODIZED, AS SPEC.(1) 18" HT. X 2" DEEP

LETTER ALUMINUMANODIZED, AS SPEC.

2"

2' -

3 1/

2"6"

2 1/

2"

2' -

0"

5' -

0"

12"X24" X 1" MANUFACTUREDSTONE MASONRY

STONE SILL @ 2' HT.REFER SPEC.

FOUNDATIONREFERSTRUCTURAL DWGS.

8" CMU W/ 3/4" STUCCO WITH INTEGRAL COLORON GALV. METAL LATHAS SPEC.

10

AS1.2

2

AS1.2

2

2


2' - 12"X24" X 1" MANUFACTUREDSTONE MASONRY

2' - STONE SILL @ 2' HT.REFER SPEC.

FOUNDATIONREFERSTRUCTURAL DWGS.

6"2'

- 0"

2 1/

2"6"2'

- 3

1/2"

2"

5' -

0"

6' -

0"

10

AS1.28" CMU W/ 3/4" STUCCO WITH INTEGRAL COLORON GALV. METAL LATHAS SPEC.

212" CMU W/ 3/4" STUCCO WITH INTEGRAL COLORON GALV. METAL LATHAS SPEC.

2 2

METALPANELON CMU

8"2'

- 0"

11 1/8"

METAL PANEL CAPSLOPE TO BACK

METAL PANELS AS SPECIFIED ON CMU

12" CMU CUT AS REQUIRED

12" CMU U-BLOCK REINFORCED WITH (4) #5 CONT. GROUT FULL

#5 VERT. AT 48"O.C. IN GROUTEDCELLS - VERIFY WITH STRUCTURE

ALUMINUM LETTERSAS SPECIFIED

ADHERED STONE SILL BOTH SIDES

12" C

MU

2' -

4"

8" C

MU

2' -

8"

12" X 24" X 1" ADHERED STONE VENEER ON MORTAR SETTING BED AND SCRATCH COAT ON GALV. METAL LATH

1/2" EXPANSION JOINT WITH E.J. MATERIAL TYPICAL

1/2" E.J.

1' - 0"1' - 0"

1/2" E.J.

4" CONC. ALL AROUNDREINFORCED

SLOPE FINISH GRADE ALL AROUND

DOWELS PERSTRUCTURE

FOR CONC. FOOTINGREFER TO STRUCTUREADDENDUM NO. 2

DOWELS PER STRUCTURE

3/4" STUCCO WITH INTEGRAL COLOR ON GALV. METAL LATH TOP OF 8" CMU

END BEAD

A

BACK

100'-0" = TOP OF FIN.CONC. SLAB

108'-8" = TOPOF WALL

1 1/

4"

3/4"

STUCCO WASH

8 X 8 X 16 CONT. BOND BM.REINFORCED WITH 1 #5 CONT. GROUTED FULL

3/4" STUCCO WITH INTEGRAL COLOR ON GALV. METAL LATHON CMU

8" CMU REINFORCED WITH1 #5 VERTICAL AT 48" O.C. IN GROUTED CELLS

END BEAD TYPICAL

FINISH GRADE SLOPESAWAY FROM SLAB

FOUNDATION REFER TOSTRUCTURE ADDENDUN NO. 2

DOWELS SAME SIZE & LOCATION OF VERT.REINFORCINGREFER TO STRUCTURE

SLOPE

METAL PANEL CAPSLOPE TO BACK

1/2" E.J.

1' - 0"1' - 0"

1/2" E.J.

5' -

0"

2' -

4"8"

2' -

0"

B

3/4" STUCCOWITH INTEGRAL ON GALV. METAL LATH

CORNER BEAD

SLOPEBOTTOM TOCREATE DRIP

NOTE: REFER TO DET. 10AFOR ADDITIONAL MATERIALS

TEATED WOOD NAILERS AS REQUIRED

BACK FRONT

END BEADTYPICAL

STONE

STUCCO

METALPANEL

CONC. FOOTINGREFER TO STRUCTURE

DOWELS PER STRUCTURE

4" CONC. ALL AROUND

6" Ø PIPE BOLLARFILLED WITH CONCRETE W/ HCP. FRONT & BACK SIGNS, REFER 2A/AS1.1

3' - 0" 3' - 0"

10' -

0"

10' -

0"

10' -

0"

18' - 0"18' - 0" 4' - 0"

WH

EE

LS

TO

P

WH

EE

LS

TO

P

WH

EE

LS

TO

P

WH

EE

LS

TO

P

3' - 0" 3' - 0"


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/8/2018 3:25:00 PM

AS1.2

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

SITE DETAILS

1/8" = 1'-0" 1HCP-PARKING AREA DETAIL

3/4" = 1'-0" 2AHCP SIGN DETAIL

1/8" = 1'-0" 3DUMPSTER DETAIL

1/4" = 1'-0" 4DUMPSTER - FRONT ELEVATION

1/4" = 1'-0" 5DUMPSTER - SIDE ELEVATION

1/4" = 1'-0" 6DUMPSTER - REAR ELEVATION

1/4" = 1'-0" 7ENLARGED PLAN - SIGN

1/4" = 1'-0" 8SIGN - FRONT ELEVATION

1/4" = 1'-0" 9SIGN - REAR ELEVATION

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3/4" = 1'-0" 10SECTION THRU SIGN

1

3/4" = 1'-0" 11WALL SECTION1

3/4" = 1'-0" 2B6" BOLLARD DETAILS

1

1

2

2 2

2

22

1/8" = 1'-0" 2CHCP-PARKING AREA DETAIL

3

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

17

/25/

2018

AD

DE

MD

UM

No.

22

8/1

/201

8A

DD

EM

DU

M N

o.4

38

/08/

2018

AD

DE

MD

UM

No.

5

3

HRDIRECTOR

H113

OPENOFFICE

H112 STAFFDEVELOPMENT

H111

COMPLIANCEH114

WOMENC101

LVNH110

PROTECTEDLEAVEH109

PROTECTEDLEAVEH108

BENEFITSH106

BENEFITSH105

HRMANAGER

H103

OPENOFFICE

Q103

RECRUITMENTH115

EMPLOYMENTSPECIALIST

H116

INTERVIEWERH117

MECHANICALC113

MENC100

INTERVIEWROOMH107

STORAGEH104

QADIRECTOR

Q109

QA ADMINASSISTANT

Q110

SPECIALISTQ111

QA NURSEQ112

LOBBY102

CUST.C105

IDFC106

WOMENC104

MECHANICALC112 STORAGE

F100

LEADQ113

LEAD.Q114

LEAD.Q115

LEAD.Q117

ACCOUNTSSUPERVISOR

F103ACCOUNTING

F104

ACCOUNTSPAYABLE

SUPERVISORF105

BILLINGSUPERVISOR

F106

CONTRACTSMANAGER

F107

ACCOUNTINGMANAGER

F110

DIRECTORCONTROLLER

F111

HALL119

SPECIALPROJECTS

F113

CONFERENCEF112

COSTACCOUNTS

F114

SUPERVISORF115

FINANCIALANALYST

F116

A/PCOORDINATOR

F117

FIRERISERC111 ACCOUNTING

PAYROLLF118

ACCOUNTINGMANAGER

F119

ELECTRICALC107

WOMENC109

VESTIBULE101

CUBICLES117

HR ADMINASSISTANT

H100

HALL104

ALCOVE106

ENTRYALCOVE

100

CONFERENCEQ104

HALL110

HALL112

HALL111

HALL114

MENC110

EDF.121

HALL120

HALL118

MENC103

HALL108

HALL107

ALCOVE116

HALL115

ALCOVE123

EDF.105

BDDIRECTOR

Q101

BREAK R./ COPY R.

H102

BD ADMINASSISTANT

Q100

LEADQ116

BDOFFICE

Q102

EDF.113

HALL122

ACCOUNTSPAYABLE

F102

BILLINGF101

DRYSTORAGE

C102

STORAGEC108

EVALUATORQ108

EVALUATORQ107

CLOSETQ106

COMMUNITYRELATION

Q105

BREAK/COPYF109

INVENTORYF108

MAILROOMH101

HALL103

VENDING109

CANOPY

MATCH LINEA

B

MATCH LINE A

B

LVT - CRYSTAL PE138- 12"X24"

LVT - IRON PE140- 12"X24"

CARPET - COOKIES & CREAM 14117 - 2'X2'

PORCELAIN TILE -GRIGIO - 12"X24"

EXPOSED CONCRTE(LIGHT BROOM FINISH)SEALED

RECESSED FLOOR MAT -124813 ENTRANCE FLOORMATS & FRAMES

VCT - V2890 ANTIQUE WHITE- 12"X12"

EXPOSED CONCRTE(TROWEL FINISH)

LVT - SPAR PE127- 12"X24"

LVT - CADMIA PE123 - 12"X24"

FLOOR FINISH LEGEND

SDT PEARL WHITE - 51953- 12"X12"


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/8/2018 2:57:26 PM

A7.1

MM VDV

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

FLOOR FINISH PLAN

N

3/32" = 1'-0" 1FLOOR FINISH PLAN - TTBH BLDG.

1

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

18

/08/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

NO

. 5

WOMENA107

CONFERENCECENTERA100A

LEASE #3C100

CORRIDORB103

BREAKROOMB114

UNISEXRR

B116

OFFICEB110

OFFICEB112

OFFICEB107STOR.

B106

JANITORB109

CONFERENCEROOMB105

UNISEXRR

B102

WAITINGAREAB100

RECEPTIONISTB104

STOR.B108

STOR.B113

IDFB115

EDFB101

STOR.A101

JANITORA105

SERVERYA104

CORRIDORA102

MENA106

EDF.A103

STOR.B111

BUFFETCOUNTER

A100B

FLOOR FINISH LEGEND

LVT - CRYSTAL PE138- 12"X24"

LVT - IRON PE140- 12"X24"






CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/8/2018 3:32:00 PM

A7.2

MM VDV

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

FLOOR FINISH PLAN

N 1/4" = 1'-0" 1FLOOR FINISH PLAN - COMMERCIAL BLDG.

1

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

18

/08/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

NO

. 5

STORAGES100

OFFICES101

OFFICES102

BREAKROOMS103

UNISEXRR.

S104

RISERROOMS106

CUSTODIANS105

SIDEWALK

SIDEWALK

SID

EW

ALK

12' X 10' OVERHEAD DOOR 12' X 10' OVERHEAD DOOR FLOOR FINISH LEGEND






CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/8/2018 3:34:05 PM

A7.3

MM VDV

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

FLOOR FINISH PLAN

N

1/4" = 1'-0" 1FLOOR FINISH PLAN - WAREHOUSE BLDG.

1

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

18

/08/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

NO

. 5

KEY FINISHES-BASE FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY BASE FINISH

B.1 4" RUBBER COVE BASEB.2 4" RUBBER STRAIGHT BASEB.3 NONE

KEY FINISHES-CEILING FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY CEILING FINISH

C.1 2' X 2' LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEMC.2 2' X 2' LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL 1HR. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLYC.3 5/8" THICK GYP. BD. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE & PAINT ON A SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEMC.4 3/4" PLASTER ON GALV. MTL. LATH OVER 7/8" H.C. @ 16" O.C. & 1-1/2" CRC @ 48" O.C.

SUSPENDED FROM STRUCTURE, PAINTED

C.5 EXPOSED STRUCTURE PAINTED

KEY FINISHES-FLOOR FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY FLOOR FINISH

F.1 L.V.T.F.2 CARPETF.3 PORCELAIN TILE ( 12" X 24" )F.4 EXPOSED CONCRETE (LIGHT BROOM FINISH)F.5 RECESSED FLOOR MATF.6 EXPOSED CONCRETE (TROWEL FINISH)F.7 VCT

KEY FINISHES-WALL FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY WALL FINISH

W.1 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE & PAINTEDW.2 GLAZED CERAMIC TILE 4" X 12" WAINSCOT UP TO 7' HIGH WITH 2" BULLNOSE, 5/8"

GYPSUM BD. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE AND PAINT ABOVE

W.3 3/4" STONE UP TO 3'-0" & 3/4" STUCCO ON GALV. MTL. LATH OVER ABOVEW.4 1" STONEW.5 NONEW.6 WALL PAPER FROM 9'-2" TO CEILING - AS SPECIFIEDW.7 GLASS WALL AS SPECIFIED

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

NUMBER NAME FLOOR BASEWALLS CEILING

REMARKSNORTH EAST SOUTH WEST FINISH HEIGHT

100 ENTRY ALCOVE F.4 B.3 W.3 W.3 W.5 W.3 C.4 8'-0"101 VESTIBULE F.5 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"102 LOBBY F.1/F.2 B.1 W.1/W.6/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 19'-4"103 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 19'-4"104 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"105 EDF. F.1 B.1 W.1 W.5 W.1 W.2 C.1 9'-0"106 ALCOVE F.4 B.3 W.5 W.4 W.4 W.4 C.4 9'-0"107 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.5 W.1 W.5 C.1 9'-0"108 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"109 VENDING F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"110 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"111 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"112 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"113 EDF. F.1 B.1 W.2 W.1 W.5 W.1 C.1 9'-0"114 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"115 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 9'-0"116 ALCOVE F.4 B.3 W.4 W.4 W.5 W.4 C.4 8'-0"117 CUBICLES F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 19'-4"118 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"119 HALL F.1 B.1 W.5 W.1 W.5 W.1 C.1 9'-0"120 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 9'-0"121 EDF. F.1 B.1 W.2 W.1 W.5 W.1 C.1 9'-0"122 HALL F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"123 ALCOVE F.4 B.3 W.4 W.4 W.5 W.4 C.4 8'-0"

C100 MEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"C101 WOMEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"C102 DRY STORAGE F.7 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"C103 MEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 8'-0"C104 WOMEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 8'-0"C105 CUST. F.4 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"C106 IDF F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.3 9'-0"C107 ELECTRICAL F.6 B.3 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.5 Str.ExpC108 STORAGE F.8 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"C109 WOMEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"C110 MEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"C111 FIRE RISER F.6 B.3 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.5 Str.ExpC112 MECHANICAL F.6 B.3 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.5 Str.ExpC113 MECHANICAL F.6 B.3 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.5 Str.ExpF100 STORAGE F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"F101 BILLING F.1 B.3 --- --- --- --- C.1 19'-4"F102 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE F.1 B.3 --- --- --- --- C.1 19'-4"F103 ACCOUNTS SUPERVISOR F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 8'-0"F104 ACCOUNTING F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 8'-0"F105 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE

SUPERVISORF.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 8'-0"

F106 BILLING SUPERVISOR F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"F107 CONTRACTS MANAGER F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 9'-0"F108 INVENTORY F.7 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 10'-0"F109 BREAK/COPY F.1 B.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"F110 ACCOUNTING MANAGER F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"F111 DIRECTOR CONTROLLER F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 9'-0"F112 CONFERENCE F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"F113 SPECIAL PROJECTS F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 9'-0"F114 COST ACCOUNTS F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 9'-0"F115 SUPERVISOR F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"F116 FINANCIAL ANALYST F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 9'-0"F117 A/P COORDINATOR F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"F118 ACCOUNTING PAYROLL F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 9'-0"F119 ACCOUNTING MANAGER F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H100 HR ADMIN ASSISTANT F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-4"H101 MAIL ROOM F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H102 BREAK R. / COPY R. F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 9'-0"H103 HR MANAGER F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H104 STORAGE F.7 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"H105 BENEFITS F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H106 BENEFITS F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H107 INTERVIEW ROOM F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 10'-0"H108 PROTECTED LEAVE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H109 PROTECTED LEAVE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H110 LVN F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 8'-0"H111 STAFF DEVELOPMENT F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 8'-0"H112 OPEN OFFICE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 8'-0"H113 HR DIRECTOR F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H114 COMPLIANCE F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H115 RECRUITMENT F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 8'-0"H116 EMPLOYMENT SPECIALIST F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"H117 INTERVIEWER F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q100 BD ADMIN ASSISTANT F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-4"Q101 BD DIRECTOR F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-4"Q102 BD OFFICE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 8'-4"Q103 OPEN OFFICE F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-4"Q104 CONFERENCE F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 12'-0"Q105 COMMUNITY RELATION F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q106 CLOSET F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q107 EVALUATOR F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 8'-0"Q108 EVALUATOR F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q109 QA DIRECTOR F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT C.1 8'-0"Q110 QA ADMIN ASSISTANT F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q111 SPECIALIST F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q112 QA NURSE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q113 LEAD F.2 B.2 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q114 LEAD. F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q115 LEAD. F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q116 LEAD F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"Q117 LEAD. F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1/ACCENT W.1 W.1 C.1 8'-0"


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/8/2018 2:32:07 PM

A9.1

MM VDV

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

ROOM SCHEDULES -TTBH BLDG.

1

1

1

1

2

122

3

3

3

3

3

3

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

17

/20/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

NO

. 12

7/2

5/20

18A

DD

EN

DU

M N

O. 2

38

/08/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

NO

. 5

7'-0

"

2'-0"

3'-6

"2'

-10"

8"

7'-0

"

8" 6" 1'-10"3'-0"

7'-0

"

3'-0"3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0"

7'-0

" 8'-0

"

2'-6" 2'-6"

3'-0" 2'-6"

7'-0

"

SOLID COREWOOD DOOR

SOLID COREWOOD DOOR

GAL. HOLLOWMETAL DOOR

ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

DOOR

ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

DOOR

A

SOLID COREWOOD DOOR

SOLID COREWOOD DOOR

SOLID COREWOOD DOOR

B C D E F G H

2" HOLLOW METALFRAME,

INTERIOR FRAME

2" HOLLOW METALFRAME

A C1 D

2" X 6"ALUMINUMFRAME

B

2" X 6"ALUMINUMFRAME


E


F

4"6'

- 8"

2"2'

- 8"

2"

10' -

0"

2"2' - 8" 2" 6' - 0" 2" 2' - 8"

2"

12' - 0"

6' - 0"

7' -

0"

4"6'

- 8"

2"2'

- 8"

2"

10' -

0"

2"4' - 2" 2" 3' - 0" 2" 4' - 2"

2"

12' - 0"

3' - 0"

7' -

0"

7' -

0"2"

2"3' - 0"

2"

3' - 4"

2"2' - 6"

2"

2' - 10"

7' -

2"

7' -

0"2"

7' -

2"

2"2' - 0"

2"

2' - 4"

8' -

0"2"

8' -

2"

2"

5' - 0"2"

5' - 4"

2" GALV. HOLLOW METALFRAME, EXTERIOR FRAME

C2

2' -

6"4'

- 8"

2"2' - 8"

2"

3' - 0"

4"

6' -

8"

2"

2' -

8"

2"

10' -

0"

2"2' - 9" 2" 2' - 9"

2"

6' - 0"

A B

1/A

6.4

2/A6.4

3/A

6.4

4/A

6.3

6/A

6.3

5/A6.3

4' -

6"


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/8/2018 2:44:27 PM

A9.3

MM VDV

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

ROOM, DOOR &WINDOW SCHEDULES- COMMERCIAL BLDG.

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

NUMBER NAME FLOOR BASEWALLS CEILING

COUNTERTOP REMARKSNORTH EAST SOUTH WEST FINISH HEIGHT

A100A CONFERENCE CENTER F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 11'/12'A100B BUFFET COUNTER F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"A101 STOR. F.4 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"A102 CORRIDOR F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"A103 EDF. F.1 B.1 W.2 W.1 W.4 W.1 C.1 9'-0"A104 SERVERY F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"A105 JANITOR F.5 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"A106 MEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"A107 WOMEN F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"B100 WAITING AREA F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 10'-2"/11'-8"B101 EDF F.1 B.1 W.4 W.4 W.1 W.2 C.1 10'-2"B102 UNISEX RR F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"B103 CORRIDOR F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B104 RECEPTIONIST F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B105 CONFERENCE ROOM F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"/10'-6"B106 STOR. F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B107 OFFICE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B108 STOR. F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B109 JANITOR F.5 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B110 OFFICE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B111 STOR. F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B112 OFFICE F.2 B.2 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B113 STOR. F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B114 BREAK ROOM F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.1 9'-0"B115 IDF F.1 B.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 W.1 C.3 9'-0"B116 UNISEX RR F.3 B.3 W.2 W.2 W.2 W.2 C.1 9'-0"C100 LEASE #3 F.6 B.3 W.3 W.3 W.4 W.3 C.4 Struc.Exp.D100 LEASE #4 F.6 B.3 W.4 W.3 W.4 W.3 C.4 Struc.Exp.E100 LEASE #5 F.6 B.3 W.4 W.3 W.4 W.3 C.4 Struc.Exp.F100 LEASE #6 F.6 B.3 W.4 W.3 W.4 W.3 C.4 Struc.Exp.G100 LEASE #7 F.6 B.3 W.4 W.3 W.4 W.3 C.4 Struc.Exp.H100 LEASE #8 F.6 B.3 W.4 W.3 W.3 W.3 C.4 Struc.Exp.

KEY FINISHES-BASE FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY BASE FINISH

B.1 4" RUBBER COVE BASEB.2 4" RUBBER STRAIGHT BASEB.3 NONE

KEY FINISHES-CEILING FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY CEILING FINISH

C.1 2' X 2' LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEMC.2 2' X 2' LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL 1HR. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLYC.3 5/8" THICK GYP. BD. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE & PAINT ON 3-5/8" MTL. STUDS @ 16" O.C.C.4 EXPOSED STRUCTURE PAINTED

KEY FINISHES-FLOOR FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY FLOOR FINISH

F.1 L.V.T.F.2 CARPETF.3 PORCELAIN TILE - (12" X 24")F.4 VCTF5 EXPOSED CONCRETE (LIGHT BROOM FINISH)F.6 NONE

KEY FINISHES-WALL FINISH SCHEDULE

KEY WALL FINISH

W.1 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE & PAINTEDW.2 GLAZED CERAMIC TILE 4" X 12" WAINSCOT UP TO 7'-0" HIGH WITH 2" BULLNOSE, 5/8"

GYP.BD. TAPE, FLOAT, TEXTURE AND PAINT ABOVE

W.3 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD TAPE & FLOATW.4 NONE

1/4" = 1'-0" 1BDOOR TYPES

1/4" = 1'-0" 2BFRAME TYPES

1/4" = 1'-0" 3WINDOW TYPE

DOOR FINISH SCHEDULE-COMMERCIAL BLDG.

Door #Pair orSingle

DOOR DIMENSIONS DOOR TYPE AND FINISHES FRAME TYPE AND FINISHES DOOR DETAILS

RemarksWidth Height ThicknessDoorType Door Material Door Finish

FrameType Frame Material Frame Finish Head Sill Jamb

A100 Pair 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" A Aluminum Anodized A Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.3 2/A6.3 3/A6.3A101 Pair 5' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" F Solid Core Wood Natural F Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1A102 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3A104 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1 20 MIN. FIRE RATINGA105 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1A106 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1 20 MIN. FIRE RATINGA107 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1 20 MIN. FIRE RATINGB100 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" B Aluminum Anodized B Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.3 2/A6.3 3/A6.3B102 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1

B103A Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B103B Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3B104 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B105 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B106 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B107 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B108 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B109 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" D Solid Core Wood Natural D Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B110 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B111 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B112 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B113 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B114 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B115 Single 2' - 6" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" D Solid Core Wood Natural D Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1B116 Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" C Solid Core Wood Natural C1 Hollow Metal Paint 1/A6.1 2/A6.1 3/A6.1

C100A Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" B Aluminum Anodized B Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.3 2/A6.3 3/A6.3C100B Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3D100A Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" B Aluminum Anodized B Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.3 2/A6.3 3/A6.3D100B Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3E100A Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" B Aluminum Anodized B Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.3 2/A6.3 3/A6.3E100B Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3F100A Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" B Aluminum Anodized B Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.3 2/A6.3 3/A6.3F100B Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3G100A Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" B Aluminum Anodized B Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.3 2/A6.3 3/A6.3G100B Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3H100A Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" B Aluminum Anodized B Aluminum Anodized 1/A6.1 2/A6.3 3/A6.3H100B Single 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H Galv. Hollow Metal Paint C2 Galv. Hollow Metal Paint 7/A6.3 8/A6.3 9/A6.3

1

2 2 23

3 3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

ION

17

/20/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

NO

. 12

7/2

5/20

18A

DD

EN

DU

M N

O. 2

38

/01/

2018

AD

DE

ND

UM

NO

. 44

8/0

8/20

18A

DD

EN

DU

M N

O. 5

18/1

412

/14

18/1

4

14/12 12/10

33

33

3

3

33

3

3

3

3

11

1

1

1

3

2

23

4

GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTESA. THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION WORK IS INDICATED ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND BY THE

REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION. A VISIT TO THE SITE WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROPERLY BID THEDEMOLITION WORK.

B. PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION WORK REQUIRED FOR THE REMOVAL AND/OR RELOCATION OF HVACFIXTURES AND EQUIPMENTS AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERABLESYSTEM UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT.

C. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REVIEW THE ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS INADDITION TO THE DIVISION 15 AND 16 DOCUMENTS TO DETERMINE THE COMPLETE SCOPE OF WORK.

D. WHERE EQUIPMENT IS INDICATED OR REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED, THE ASSOCIATED SERVICES SHALL BECAPPED AT A CONCEALED LOCATION.

E. WHERE SERVICES RUN ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS OR IN WALLS WHICH ARE TO REMAINUNDISTURBED, SERVICES SHALL BE CAPPED AT CONCEALED LOCATION AND ABANDONED

F. WHERE THE REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT RENDERS EQUIPMENT DOWNSTREAM INOPERABLE, SERVICES SHALLBE EXTENDED TO THE DOWNSTREAM EQUIPMENT SO THAT THE FIXTURES ARE LEFT IN OPERATINGCONDITION.

G. COORDINATE DEMOLITION OF DIVISION 15 SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED WITH ALL OTHER TRADES.

H. ALL EXISTING H.V.A.C. AND EQUIPMENT REMOVED DURING CONSTRUCTION THAT ARE NOT TO BEREUSED SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE JOB SITE AND PROPERLY RETURNED TO THE OWNER, IF DESIRED BYOWNER.

I. WHERE EXISTING EQUIPMENT IS TO BE RELOCATED, BE CAUTIOUS TO PREVENT DAMAGE DURING THEREMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION. WHERE DAMAGE OCCURS, THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPLACED ORREPAIRED TO THE SATISFACTION AND APPROVAL OF THE ARCHITECT AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THEOWNER.

J. EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO BE REUSED SHALL BE CLEANED AND REPAIRED AT THE DISCRETION OF THEARCHITECT WHERE APPLICABLE.

K. ALL DEVICES ATTACHED TO WALLS OR CEILINGS SHALL BE REMOVED PER DEMOLITION NOTE A - LWHETHER SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR NOT.

KEYED NOTES: MECHANICALINDICATED AIR DEVICES, FLEX DUCTS, TAPS, AND DAMPERS TO BE REMOVED ANDDISPOSED OF. CAP EXISTING DUCTWORK WHERE DUCTWORK TAPPED OFF OF SEALAND RE-INSULATE.

1

EXISTING AIR DEVICE TO BE REMOVED AND DISPOSED OF. PROVIDE WITHADDITIONAL DUCTWORK AS NEEDED TO REMOUNT IN CEILING WHERE INDICATEDON REMODEL PLAN.

2

EXISTING SUPPLY AIR/ RETURN AIR/ OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK AND AIR DEVICES TOREMAIN.

3

EXISTING UNIT TO REMAIN. CLEAN AND SERVICE UNIT. PROVIDE WITH REFRIGERANT,FILTERS, AND BELTS. FLUSH CONDENSATE LINES.

4

2

3

MD1.1

08/08/18

3533 Moreland Dr. Ste A l Weslaco, Tx 78596p:956.973.0500 l f:956-351-5750www.trinitymep.com I Copyright 2018Texas Registered Engineering Firm - F10362Project number:17.4.25

07/20/18

MEP ENGINEERING

P:\Medical\2017.16 TTBH Edinburg Phase II Renovation\3 CD\LF 2018 07 08.png


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen

McAllen

1007 Walnut Ave.

McAllen, Texas 78501

V. 956.686.7771

F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

4:25:04 PM

MM MM

2017.16

PH

AS

E I &

P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

G

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

A

ND

A

DD

IT

IO

NS

Edinburg,

Texas

TR

OP

IC

AL T

EX

AS

B

EH

AV

IO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

RE

VIS

IO

NS

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IP

TIO

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

1

KEY PLAN

N

08/08/18

08/08/18

03

8-08-18

Addendum

#5

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

3

2ND FLOOR - WORKSTATION WORKROOM DEMO FLOOR PLAN

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

2

2ND FLOOR - OFFICE IMPROVEMENT DEMO FLOOR PLAN

N

MECHANICAL DEMO

FLOOR PLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

121939

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

Wilford L. McGee III

MATCHLINE A

MATCHLINE B

MATCHLINE A

MATCHLINE B

HRDIRECTOR

H113

OPENOFFICE

H112

STAFFDEVELOPMENT

H111

COMPLIANCEH114

WOMENC101

LVNH110

PROTECTEDLEAVEH109

PROTECTEDLEAVEH108

BENEFITSH106

BENEFITSH105

HRMANAGER

H103

OPENOFFICE

Q103

RECRUITMENTH115


H116

INTERVIEWERH117

MECHANICALC113

MENC100

INTERVIEWROOMH107

STORAGEH104

QADIRECTOR

Q109

QA ADMINASSISTANT

Q110

SPECIALISTQ111

QA NURSEQ112

LOBBY102

CUST.C105

IDFC106

WOMENC104

VESTIBULE101

HR ADMINASSISTANT

H100

HALL104

ALCOVE106

ENTRYALCOVE

100

CONFERENCEQ104

HALL110

HALL112

HALL111 MEN

C103

HALL108

HALL107

EDF.105

BDDIRECTOR

Q101

VENDING109 BREAK R.

/ COPY R.H102

DRYSTORAGE

C102

8"ø

A 150

10"ø

C 300

8"ø

A 200

10"ø

C 200

8"ø

A 200

10"ø

C 200

10"ø

C 200

8"ø

A 200

10"ø

C 200

8"ø

A 200

8"ø

A 150

10"ø

C 30010"ø

C 150

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 100

8"ø

C 100

10"ø

C 250

6"ø

A 50

6"ø

B 50

6"ø

A 50

6"ø

B 50

6"ø

A 50

24"x

14"

18"x

14"

14"x

12"

12"x10"

24"x

14"

16"x

14"

14"x12"8"x12"

AHU-1

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 200

6"ø

A 50

10"ø

C 250

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 200

10"ø

C 250

8"ø

A 250

8"ø

C 756"ø

A 50

8"ø

A 75

(2)

(2)

(2)

20"x14"

14"x

14"

14"x

10"

22"x14" 18"x14"

14"x

12"

8"x1

4"

BD ADMINASSISTANT

Q100

8"ø

A 200

10"ø

C 200

10"ø

C 175

8"ø

A 175

10"ø

C 250

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 125

6"ø

B 506"ø

B 50

6"ø

A 50

8"ø

A 1508"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

C 125

18"x6"

E 225

18"x6"

E 22516"x10"

E 225

16"x10"

E 225

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 125

10"ø

C 150

20"x16"

D 900

24"x

18"

14"x12"

14"x

12"

8"ø

A 125

6"ø

A 50

6"ø

A 75

AHU-2

AHU-3

18"x18"

16"x

18"

16"x

12"

14"x12" 12"x12"

8"x8"

8"x8"

10"ø

C 300

10"ø

C 350

12"x12"

10"ø

C 150

12"x8"

12"x

12"

18"x12"

FC-1

8"x12"14"x12"

18"x

14"

20"x

16"

18"x

16"

16"x

14"

14"x10"

8"ø

A 200

10"ø

C 200

8"ø

A 20010"ø

C 200 8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 15010"ø

C 325

10"ø

C 150

10"ø

C 150

10"ø

C 175

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 175

6"ø

A 50

6"ø

C 50

10"ø

C 300

CU-1

CU-2

CU-312

"x12

"

12"x

8"12

"x10

"

AHU-8

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

A 200

8"ø

B 100

10"ø

C 200

10"ø

C 150

10"ø

C 150

CU-8

CU-4

FCCU-1

CU-6

1

2

3

1

EF-136"ø

4

HVLS-1

1

2

1

2

8"ø

(L-3)16"x12"

8"ø

10"ø

8"ø

6"ø 6"ø

8"ø

5

FD

FD

FD

FD

FDFD

EF-1

EF-2

EF-3

EF-4EF-5

UH-1

(L-2)

T

T

T

S

8"ø

6"ø

6"ø8"ø

6

6

6

7

TO

AH

U-3

TO AHU-2

TO

AH

U-1

8

9

10

10

10

8

11

9

7

L-4

12"x

12"

40"x16"

9

12

13

7

14

TYP.15

T TO AHU-4

3

3

3

3

3

3

LA ENOIS N

121939

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA


MEP ENGINEERING3533 Moreland Dr. Ste A l Weslaco, Tx78596 p:956.973.0500 l f:956-351-5750www.trinitymep.com I Copyright 2017Texas Registered Engineering Firm - F10362Project number:


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:41:23 PM

M1.2

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

FLOOR PLAN AREA"A"

1/8" = 1'-0" 1MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA "A"

MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES

1 PLACE CONDENSING UNIT ON 4" CONCRETE PAD.2 PROVIDE W/ REFRIGERANT LINE WALL PENETRATION HOUSING/PANEL EQUAL TO "WALL VAULT" MADE BY

"ROOF PENETRAITION HOUSINGS, LLC". WALL PANEL TO BE SOZED TO ACCOMODATED REFRIGERANTLINES & CONDUIT, COORDINATE W/ ELECTRICAL.

3 MOUNT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT CENTERED ABOVE DOOR. REFER TO PLUMBING PAGES FORCONDENSATE ROUTING.

4 ROUND EXHAUST DUCT OUT TO ALUMINUM WALL CAP.5 RETURN AIR DUCT TO BE SIZED ACCORDING TO RESPECTIVE AIR OPENING.6 UNIT TO BE MOUNTED ON A 30" HIGH PLATFORM CONSTRUCTED OF 1-1/2" ANGLE IRON/1" SQUARE METAL

TUBING. WRAP PLATFORM IN GALVANIZED SHEET METAL. LINE INTERIOR OF PLATFORM W/ 1"DUCTBOARD, W/ FOIL FACING AIRSTREAM. COAT INSDE W/ MASTIC (TO FACILITATE CLEANING) AND SEALAIR TIGHT.

7 COORDINATE LOCATION OF LOUVERS TO NOT CONFLICT WITH CONTROL JOINTS AND DOWNSPOUTS.8 EXHUAST DUCT TO DROP INTO SOFFIT MOUNTED LOUVER.9 CONTROLS FOR A/C UNIT WILL BE BY MEANS OF HVAC CONTROLS. MOUNT THERMOSTAT AT 48" ABOVE

FINISHED FLOOR. PROVIDE WITH KEYED CLEAR PLASTIC COVER.

10 DROP RETURN AIR/OUTSIDE AIR DUCT INTO RETURN AIR PLENUM.11 REMOTE TEMPERATURE TO BE MOUNTED AT THIS LOCATION 48" A.F.F.12 HVLS FAN TO BE MOUNTED AT THIS LOCATION, PROVIDE HANGING HARDWARE AS REQUIRED.13 HANG AIR HANDLER FROM STRUCTURE AND PROVIDE W/ VIBRATION ISOLATION. PROVIDE TWO 4"X4"

TREATED WOOD TIMBERS INSIDE AN AUXILIARY DRAIN PAN ON WHICH TO MOUNT AIR HANDLING UNIT.REFER TO PLUMBING PAGES FOR CONDENSATE ROUTING. REFER TO IMC 307.2.3 FOR AUXILIARY DRAINPAN SIZING (OR JURISDICTION HAVING AUTHORITY).

14 HVLS FAN CONTROLLER. MOUNT AT 48" A.F.F. MECH SUBCONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIREDCONTROLLERS, EQUIPMENT AND CABLING TO BE INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

15 PROVIDE WITH MOTORIZED DAMPER WITH OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION. DAMPER OT BE ACTUATED TO MAXONLY WHEN COMPRESSOR OR HEATER IS ENERGIZED AND ACTUATED TO THE CLOSED POSITION AT ALLOTHER TIMES. PROVIDE WITH ADDITIONAL MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER TO BALANCE CFM AMOUNTS OFOUTSIDE AIR. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE W/ ANY ELECTRICAL HARDWARE TO POWERDAMPER. DROP OUTSIDE AIR DUCT INTO RETURN AIR PLENUM.

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

3

3

MATCHLINE A

MATCHLINE B

MATCHLINE A

MATCHLINE BMECHANICAL

C112

STORAGEF100

LEADQ113

LEAD.Q114

LEAD.Q115

LEAD.Q117ACCOUNTS

SUPERVISORF103

ACCOUNTINGF104

ACCOUNTSPAYABLE

SUPERVISORF105

BILLINGSUPERVISOR

F106

CONTRACTSMANAGER

F107

ACCOUNTINGMANAGER

F110

DIRECTORCONTROLLER

F111

HALL119

SPECIALPROJECTS

F113

CONFERENCEF112

COSTACCOUNTS

F114

SUPERVISORF115

FINANCIALANALYST

F116

A/PCOORDINATOR

F117

FIRERISERC111

ACCOUNTINGPAYROLL

F118

ACCOUNTINGMANAGER

F119

WOMENC109

CUBICLES117

ENTRYALCOVE

100

HALL114

MENC110

EDF.121

HALL120

HALL118

ALCOVE116

HALL115

ALCOVE123

BDDIRECTOR

Q101

BDDIRECTOR

Q101

6"ø

A 50

10"ø

A 300

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 1258"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 175

8"ø

A 225

8"ø

A 225

8"ø

A 225

8"ø

A 225

24"x16"20"x16"16"x16"

16"x

12"

12"ø

C 450

10"ø

C 450

10"ø

C 350

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 175

10"ø

C 250

12"x10" 16"x14" 20"x16"

24"x

16"

24"x16"

10"ø

C 200

8"ø

A 250

8"ø

A 100

8"ø

A 100

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 200

8"ø

A 200

8"ø

A 200

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 200

10"ø

C 250

10"ø

C 250

10"ø

C 200

10"ø

C 20010"ø

C 200

10"ø

C 250

10"ø

C 200

26"x16"

24"x

16"

20"x16"

20"x12"12"x12"

AHU-7

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 125

8"ø

A 150

6"ø

B 50

6"ø

B 50

14"x10"16"x14"

20"x

14"

12"x10"

10"ø

C 250

10"ø

C 125

18"x6"

E 400

AHU-6

AHU-4

16"x20"

24"x20"

D 850(2)

18"x

16"

AHU-526"x16"

24"x16"20"x16"

16"x

12"

1

2

3

3 3

3

10"ø

C 150

8"ø

A 150

8"ø

14"x14"

8"ø

6"ø

EF-6

EF-7

10"ø

C 175

8"ø

A 175

10"ø

C 150

8"ø

A 150

10"ø

C 150

8"ø

A 150

10"ø

C 150

8"ø

A 150

10"ø

FD

FD

FD

FD

FDFDFD

FD

FD

UH-2

L-1

L-4

T

TO AHU-5

(2)T

TO AHU-6

TTO AHU-7

4

5

5

18"x6"

E 225

18"x6"

E 200

18"x6"

E 22518"x6"

E 225

18"x6"

E 22518"x6"

E 225

5

6

6

TYP.7

TYP.8

3

3

3

LA ENOIS N

121939

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA




CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:41:29 PM

M1.3

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

FLOOR PLAN AREA"B"

1/8" = 1'-0" 1MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA "B"MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES

1 PLACE CONDENSING UNIT ON 4" CONCRETE PAD.2 PROVIDE W/ REFRIGERANT LINE WALL PENETRATION HOUSING/PANEL EQUAL TO "WALL VAULT" MADE BY "ROOF PENETRAITION

HOUSINGS, LLC". WALL PANEL TO BE SOZED TO ACCOMODATED REFRIGERANT LINES & CONDUIT, COORDINATE W/ ELECTRICAL.

3 UNIT TO BE MOUNTED ON A 30" HIGH PLATFORM CONSTRUCTED OF 1-1/2" ANGLE IRON/1" SQUARE METAL TUBING. WRAPPLATFORM IN GALVANIZED SHEET METAL. LINE INTERIOR OF PLATFORM W/ 1" DUCTBOARD, W/ FOIL FACING AIRSTREAM. COATINSDE W/ MASTIC (TO FACILITATE CLEANING) AND SEAL AIR TIGHT.

4 ROUND EXHAUST DUCT OUT TO ALUMINUM WALL CAP.5 CONTROLS FOR A/C UNIT WILL BE BY MEANS OF HVAC CONTROLS. MOUNT THERMOSTAT AT 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR.

PROVIDE WITH KEYED CLEAR PLASTIC COVER.

6 COORDINATE LOCATION OF LOUVERS TO NOT CONFLICT WITH CONTROL JOINTS AND DOWNSPOUTS.7 PROVIDE WITH MOTORIZED DAMPER WITH OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION. DAMPER OT BE ACTUATED TO MAX ONLY WHEN

COMPRESSOR OR HEATER IS ENERGIZED AND ACTUATED TO THE CLOSED POSITION AT ALL OTHER TIMES. PROVIDE WITHADDITIONAL MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER TO BALANCE CFM AMOUNTS OF OUTSIDE AIR. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TOPROVIDE W/ ANY ELECTRICAL HARDWARE TO POWER DAMPER. DROP OUTSIDE AIR DUCT INTO RETURN AIR PLENUM.

8 DROP RETURN AIR/OUTSIDE AIR DUCT INTO RETURN AIR PLENUM.

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

27

-25-

1 8A

dden

dum

#2

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

12/2

612

/16

T

6

5

4

7

3

AHU-9

22

2

2

2

CU-9

8

9

10

A12"Ø

450(2)

A8"Ø

100

C16"Ø

875(2)

18/1

810"Ø

A12"Ø

425(2)

2

2

2

1

1

1

2A8"Ø

175

A8"Ø

175

C12"Ø

350

KEYED NOTES: MECHANICALNEW SUPPLY AIR/ RETURN AIR DEVICE TO TIE INTO EXISTING SUPPLY AIR/ RETURN AIRDUCTWORK. PROVIDE NEW DUCTWORK AS NECESSARY.

PLACE CONDENSING UNIT ON 4" CONCRETE PAD.

HANG AIR HANDLER FROM STRUCTURE AND PROVIDE W/ VIBRATION ISOLATION.PROVIDE TWO 4"x4" TREATED WOOD TIMBERS INSIDE AN AUXILIARY DRAIN PAN ONWHICH TO MOUNT AIR HANDLING UNIT. REFER TO PLUMBING PAGES FORCONDENSATE ROUTING. REFER TO IMC 307.2.3 FOR AUXILIARY DRAIN PAN SIZING(OR JURISDICTION HAVING AUTHORITY)

1

PROVIDE W/ MOTORIZED DAMPER W/ OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION. DAMPER TO BEACTUATED TO MAX ONLY WHEN COMPRESSOR OR HEATER IS ENERGIZED &ACTUATED TO THE CLOSED POSITION @ ALL OTHER TIMES. PROVIDE W/ ADDITIONALMANUAL BALANCING DAMPER TO BALANCE CFM AMOUNTS OF OUTSIDE AIR.MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE W/ ANY ELECTRICAL HARDWARE TOPOWER DAMPER.

RETURN AIR DUCT TO BE SIZED ACCORDING TO RESPECTIVE AIR OPENING.

PROVIDE W/ REFRIGERANT LINE WALL PENETRATION HOUSING/PANEL EQUAL TO"WALL VAULT" MADE BY "ROOF PENETRAITION HOUSINGS, LLC". WALL PANEL TO BESIZED TO ACCOMMODATED REFRIGERANT LINES & CONDUIT, COORDINATE W/ELECTRICAL. REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT ACCESS PORTS LOCATED OUTDOORS SHALL BETITLED WITH LOCK-TYPE TAMPER-RESISTANT CAPS OR SHALL BE OTHERWISE SCOREDTO PREVENT UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS.

CONTROLS FOR A/C UNIT WILL BE BY MEANS OF A 24 VOLT 7-DAY PROGRAMMABLETHERMOSTAT WITH HEAT-OFF-COOL AND FAN ON-AUTO CAPABILITIES SHOWN ON ADIGITAL DISPLAY. MOUNT THERMOSTAT AT 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. PROVIDEWITH KEYED CLEAR PLASTIC COVER.

EXISTING SUPPLY AIR/ RETURN AIR, OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK/ AIR DEVICES/ HVACEQUIPMENT.

2

TIE NEW OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK INTO EXISTING OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK.3

4

5

6

7

8

9

REFRIGERANT LINES UP TO SECOND FLOOR THRU FURRING NEXT TO COLUMN.10

2

3

M1.5

08/08/18


07/20/18

MEP ENGINEERING



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen

McAllen

1007 Walnut Ave.


V. 956.686.7771

F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

4:25:04 PM

MM MM

2017.16

PH

AS

E I &

P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

G

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

A

ND

A

DD

IT

IO

NS

Edinburg, T

exas

TR

OP

IC

AL T

EX

AS

B

EH

AV

IO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

RE

VIS

IO

NS

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IP

TIO

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

1

KEY PLAN

N

08/08/18

08/08/18

03

8-08-18

Addendum

#5

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

3

2ND FLOOR - WORKSTATION WORKROOM FLOOR PLAN

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

2

2ND FLOOR - OFFICE IMPROVEMENT FLOOR PLAN

N

MECHANICAL

FLOOR PLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

121939

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text


DX PACKAGED UNIT SCHEDULETAG

TYPEDISCHARGE CONFIGURATION

AREA SERVEDFAN DATA

SUPPLY CFMMIN. OUTSIDE AIR (CFM)EXT. STATIC INCHES WC

MIN FAN POWERCOOLING COIL

ENTERING AIR DB/WB (°F)LEAVING AIR DB/WB (°F)

MIN. TOTAL/SENSIBLE CAPACITY (MBH)DESIGN RETURN AIR DB/WB (°F)

DESIGN OUTSIDE AIR DB/WB (°F)HEATING SELECTION

HEAT TYPE/AMBIENT DB (°F)HEAT INPUT/STAGES

ENTERING/LEAVING DB (°F)DETAILS AND ACCESSORIES

MIN COOL/HEAT EFFICIENCYCOMPRESSOR QTY/COOL STAGE QTY

VOLTAGE/PHASEMCA/MOCP

MOUNTING

MANUFACTURERMODEL

NOMINAL UNIT SIZE TONNAGEMAX WEIGHT

NOTES:

NOTES:01. PROVIDE W/ FACTORY DISCONNECT & GFI DUPLEX 120V RECEPTACLE, FACTORY PWRD.02. PROVIDE COND COILS W/ HAIL GUARDS.03. PROVIDE W/ MOTORIZED OA DAMPER, DIFF ENTH ECON, & BARR RELIEF DAMPER.04. PROVIDE W/ HINGED FILTER ACCESS DOOR & MERV 8 FILTERS, TWO SETS.05. TRANE, LENNOX, CARRIER, YORK APPROVED AS MANUFACTURERS.06. PROVIDE IBC 2015 COMPLIANT CURB & ATTACHMENTS FROM UNIT TO CURB & CURB TO STRUCTURE. EQUIPMENT OR CURB MANUFACTURER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ENGINEERED DETAIL ANALYSIS OF: A) ATTACHMENT OF EQUIPMENT TO CURB. B) CURB TO STRUCTURE. C) CURB & ATTACHMENT HARDWARE STRENGTH. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL & STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ROOF SUBSTRATE DETAILS. EQUIPMENT OR CURB MANUFACTURER IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ENGINEERED INSTALLATION DRAWINGS FOR ITEMS 'A' & 'B' LISTED ABOVE. BOTH, THE ENGINEERED ANALYSIS & THE ENGINEERED INSTALLATION DRAWINGS SHALL BE PERFORMED SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS BUILDING & PROJECT SITE & STAMPED & SEALED BY A TEXAS LICENSED ENGINEER. SUBMITTALS WILL NOT BE APPROVED UNTIL ALL DOCUMENTATION LISTED ABOVE IS PROVIDED ACCURATELY.07. CLEARANCES SHOWN ON PLANS ARE FOR SCHEDULED MAKE/MODEL. IF A SUBSTITUTION IS MADE, CONTRACTOR TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING CLEARANCES AS PER SUBSTITUTED MANUFACTURER.08. PROVIDE W/ DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION, PROVIDE W/ CO2 SENSOR IN SPACE.

RTU-1SNGL ZN VAVDOWNFLOW

OFFICES

2600250

0.6252.0 HP - VFD

76.8/63.555.4/54.1

63/5373/61104/81

ELEC/3318.0 KW/1

67/89

13.1 EER/-2/2

480/333/35

14" TDI CURB

TRANETHC0746.0 Tons1325 lbs

1-8

RTU-2SNGL ZN VAVDOWNFLOW

17502500.5

1.0 HP - ECM

77.1/64.556.2/54.3

52/3973/61104/81

ELEC/3312.0 KW/2

65/87

17 SEER/-1/2

480/324/25

14" TDI CURB

TRANETHC0675.0 Tons1000 lbs

1-8

DX MINI-SPLIT SCHEDULEINDOOR UNIT TAG

SERVESLOCATION

UNIT TYPEFAN PROPERTIES

MIN SUPPLY (CFM)MINIMUM O/A (CFM)

UNIT CAPACITIESENTERING AIR (DB/WB)

TOTAL CAPACITY (BTUHHEATING CAPACITY (BTUH)

UNIT DETAILSVOLTAGE/PHASEMANUFACTURER

MODEL NO.MAX WEIGHT (LBS)

CONDENSING UNIT TAGDETAILS


AMB. AIR TEMP. (CLG°F/HTG°F)REFRIGERANT

COOLING MODE OPER. RANGEHEATING MODE OPER. RANGE

MANUFACTURERMODEL NO.

MAX WEIGHT (LBS)MIN COOL/HEAT EFFICIENCYMIN. EQUIV. LINE LENGTH (FT)

MIN. VERTICAL RISE (FT)

CONTROL TYPE

NOTES

NOTES:

01. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE SINGLE CIRCUIT POWER FROM

SERVICE TO OUTDOOR UNIT & WIRE TO INDOOR UNIT.

02. WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER.

03. PROVIDE INDOOR UNITS WITH MOUNTING BRACKETS IF REQUIRED.

04. SEE PLUMBING FOR CONDENSATE ROUTING.

05. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CONCRETE PAD TO ANCHOR CONDENSER TO.

06. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE LINE SETS.

07. SIGHT GLASSES, FILTER DRYERS, & FIELD SUPPLIED EXPANSION VALVES ARE

NOT TO BE USED ON THIS EQUIPMENT.

08. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS & PIPING RECOMMENDATIONS.

09. PROVIDE W/ OPTIONS/ACCESSORIES REQ. FOR LOW AMBIENT COOLING.

FC-1IT ROOM

WALLCOOLING ONLY

2500

74/629,000

0

208/1DAIKINFTK09

25

FCCU-1

208/112/15104/30R-410A

15°F - 115°FN/A

DAIKINRK09

7519 SEER/-

6545

WL-RC

ALL

FAN SCHEDULETAG

SERVICELOCATION

FAN PROPERTIESCFM

FAN RPMEXT SP (IN WG)

FAN POWERVOLTS/PHASESOUND LEVEL

MOUNTING

MANUFACTURERMODEL

MAX WEIGHT

NOTES

NOTES:01. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY INSTALLED DISCONNECT.02. INTERLOCK FAN W/ LIGHTS.03. PROVIDE W/ BACKDRAFT DAMPER.04. PROVIDE W/ FAN SPEED CONTROL.05. PROVIDE W/ TIMED DELAY SHUTOFF06. PROVIDE W/ WALL MOUNTED ROTARY TIMED DIAL SWITCH, 0-60 MINS, LABELED "VENT FAN".

EF-1,2,4-7,9,13,14SINGLE RRs

CEILING

756810.2

19 W120/1

1.0 SONECEILING

GREENHECKSP-B9025 lbs

1-5

EF-3BREAK ROOM

CEILING

2008380.2543 W120/1

1.5 SONESCEILING

GREENHECKSP-A200

75 lbs

1,3,4,6

EF-8,10-12RRs

CEILING

1009490.2

80 W120/1

1.5 SONESCEILING

GREENHECKSP-B11025 lbs

1-5

UNIT HEATER SCHEDULETAG

SERVICE/LOCATIONDETAILS & ACCESSORIES

VOLTS/PHASEPOWER INPUT

AMPERAGE

MANUFACTURERMODEL

NOTES

NOTES:01. PROVIDE W/ AUTOMATICE ON/OFF VIA THERMOSTAT.02. UNIT TO SWITCH ON WHEN SPACE TEMPERATURE REACHES 35°.03. PROVIDE W/ DISCONNECT.04. PROVIDE W/ SURFACE MOUNT FRAME

UH-1,2RISER ROOM

208/11 KW

5

MARKEL(3000 series)

ALL

HVLS FAN SCHEDULETAG

SERVICELOCATION

DETAILS & ACCESSORIESFAN DIAMETERBLADE COUNTMAX FAN RPM

FAN POWERVOLTS/PHASEMCA/MOCP

MAX SOUND LEVELFAN WEIGHT

MANUFACTURERMODEL

NOTES

NOTES:01. VERIFY EXTENSION TUBE LENGTH & MOUNTING BRACKET WITH MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO ORDERING. I-BEAM MOUNTING SYSTEM.02. PROVIDE W/ WALL MOUNTED CONTROLS, DIGITAL TOUCH SCREEN, SUITABLE FOR CONTROLLING FAN QUANTITY INDICATED ON PLANS.03. FAN SHALL BE AMCA CERTIFIED FOR FLOW PERFORMANCE.04. PROVIDE FAN WITH ONE YEAR FULL LABOR WARRANTY.05. PROVIDE FAN WITH NON-PRORATED 12 YR PARTS WARRANTY ON MOTOR, DRIVE, ELECTRONIC CONTROLS, & WALL MOUNTED KEYPAD.06. PROVIDE FAN WITH LIFETIME WARRANTY ON HUB/BLADES.07. FIRE DISCONNECT TO BE TIED INTO FACP SUCH THAT DURING ALARM EVENTS, FANS ARE DISCONNECTED FROM POWER.08. MACRO-AIR, BIG ASS FANS ARE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS.

HVLS-1WAREHOUSESTRUCTURE

8 FT6

220 RPM1.0 HP208/15/15

61 db150 LBS

MACRO-AIRAVD 550

ALL NOTES APPLY

AIR DEVICE SCHEDULETAG

SERVICE TYPEPHYSICAL PROPERTIES

FACE SIZENECK SIZE

MOUNTING SURFACEDETAILS AND ACCESSORIES

DAMPER TYPEACCESSORY

COLOR FINISHMATERIAL

MANUFACTURERMODEL

NOTES

NOTES:01. COORDINATE COLOR OF AIR DEVICE & FRAME W/ ARCHITECT.

ASUPPLY

24"x24"SEE PLANSCEILING

OPPOSED BLADEINSUL BACKPAN

WHITESTEEL

PRICESCD

BSUPPLY


OPPOSED BLADEINSUL BACK PAN

WHITEALUMINUM

PRICEASCD

CRETURN


OPPOSED BLADEINSUL BACK PAN

WHITEALUMINUM

PRICE80

DRETURN

SEE PLANSSEE PLANS

WALL

OPPOSED BLADENONE

STEEL

PRICE535

ESUPPLY

SEE PLANSSEE PLANS

WALL

OPPOSED BLADENONE

ALUMINUM

PRICE620

LOUVER SCHEDULETAG

TYPESERVICE

DETAILS AND ACCESSORIESMAX CFM

LENGTH/HEIGHT (IN)FREE AREA (SQ FT)

MAX VELOCITY (FPM)MAX PRESSURE DROP (IN. H2O)

FINISHINCLUDED SCREENS

ACTUATION TYPEBORDER STYLE

MAUNUFACTURERMODEL

NOTES

NOTES:01. LOUVER OPENINGS TO BE SAW CUT.02. SEAL OPENING WEATHER TIGHT.

L-1INTAKE

AHU-4,5,6,7

100056/162.045000.05

1.2 mils 70% PVDFBIRD

NONE2" FLANGE

GREENHECKEHH-401

1,2

L-2INTAKE

AHU-1,2,3

75040/161.475200.05

1.2 mils 70% PVDFBIRD

NONE2" FLANGE

GREENHECKEHH-401

1,2

L-3INTAKEAHU-8

5016/80.19270

0.0251.2 mils 70% PVDF

BIRDNONE

2" FLANGE

GREENHECKEHH-201

1,2

L-4EXHAUST

EF-4,5;10,11

20012/120.26770

0.08751.2 mils 70% PVDF

BIRDNONE

2" FLANGE

GREENHECKEDJ-401

1,2

AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULETAG

TYPEFLOW CONFIGURATION

AREA SERVEDINDOOR UNIT FAN

SUPPLY CFMMIN. OUTSIDE AIR (CFM)EXT. STATIC INCHES WC

MIN FAN POWERINDOOR UNIT COOLING COIL

ENTERING AIR DB/WB (°F)LEAVING AIR DB/WB (°F

MIN. TOTAL/SENSIBLE CAPACITY (MBH)DESIGN RETURN AIR DB/WB (°F)

DESIGN OUTSIDE AIR DB/WB (°F)INDOOR UNIT HEATING SELECTION

HEATER TYPE/AMBIENT DESIGN DB (°F)HEAT INPUT/STAGES

ENTERING/LEAVING DB (°F)DETAILS AND ACCESSORIES


MANUFACTURERMODEL

NOMINAL UNIT SIZE TONNAGEMAX WEIGHT (lbs)

NOTES

CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULETAGOUTDOOR UNIT ELECTRICAL


DETAILS AND ACCESSORIESMIN COOL/HEAT EFFICIENCY

COMPRESSOR QTY/STAGE QTYCOOL/HEAT AMBIENT DB (°F)

MANUFACTURERMODEL

NOMINAL UNIT SIZE TONNAGEMAX WEIGHT

NOTES

NOTES:01. PROVIDE CONDENSER W/ FACTORY HAIL GUARDS & RUBBER ISOLATOR MOUNTING KIT.02. PROVIDE W/ SINGLE POINT PWR; TRANE, CARRIER, LENNOX, ACCEPTABLE MFGs.03. PROVIDE W/ SINGLE ZONE VAV CONTROL.04. CLEARANCES SHOWN ON PLANS ARE FOR SCHEDULED MAKE/MODEL. IF A SUBSTITUTION IS MADE, CONTRACTOR TO ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROVIDING CLEARANCES AS PER SELECTED MANUFACTURER.05. PROVIDE 480/3 HEATER ACCESSORY W/ FACTORY STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER TO AIR-HANDLER VOLTAGE/PHASE.

AHU-1SNGL ZN VAV

VERTICAL

20001500.5

1.0 HP - ECM

75.3/62.855.8/53.7

52/4173/61104/81

ELEC/339.6 KW/1

68/84

480/315/15

TRANEGAM5B0C60

5.0 TONS200 lbs

2-5

CU-1

480/310/15

17 SEER/-1/2

104/33

TRANE4TTA70605.0 TONS325 lbs

1-4

AHU-2,4,7SNGL ZN VAV

VERTICAL

18002000.5

1.0 HP - ECM

76.4/63.755.7/53.6

51/9373/61104/81

ELEC/339.6 KW/1

66/83

480/315/15

TRANEGAM5B0C60

5.0 TONS200 lbs

2-5

CU-2,4,7

480/310/15

17 SEER/-1/2

104/33


1-4

AHU-3SNGL ZN VAV

VERTICAL

29004000.75

2.0 HP - VFD

77/64.355.5/54.8

87/7273/61104/81

ELEC/3315.0 KW/2

65/82

480/326/30

TRANETWE090

7.5 TONS375 LBS

2-4

CU-3

480/317/20

11.2 EER/-2/2

104/33

TRANETTA090

7.5 TONS400 lbs

1-4

AHU-5,6SNGL ZN VAV

VERTICAL

2600300

0.6252.0 HP - VFD

76.4/63.855.9/55.1

67/5873/61104/81

ELEC/3315.0 KW/2

66/85

480/326/30

TRANETWE073

6.0 TONS375 lbs

2-4

CU-5,6

480/315/20

11.2 EER/-2/2

104/33

TRANETTA073

6.0 TONS175 lbs

1-4

AHU-8CONST VOLVERTICAL

600500.5

1/3 HP - ECM

75.6/6354.6/53.2

16/1373/61104/81

ELEC/333.6 KW/1

67/86

208/125/25

TRANEGAM5B0A18

1.5 TONS125 lbs

2,4

CU-8

208/112/20

16 SEER/-1/1

104/33

TRANE4TTR60181.5 TONS175 lbs

1,2,4

AHU-9SNGL ZN VAVHORIZONTALCOMP LAB

17503000.5

3/4 HP - ECM

78.3/65.1

73/61104/81

ELEC/339.6 KW/1

63/81

480/315/15

TRANEGAM5B0C60

5.0 TONS200 lbs

2-5

CU-9

480/310/15

17 SEER/-1/2

104/33


1-4

3

LA ENOIS N

121939

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA




CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:41:31 PM

M3.1

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

MECHANICALSCHEDULES

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

27

-25-

1 8A

dden

dum

#2

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

S/S

SPD

SKT ‐ 1

HDW ‐ 1

HDW ‐ 2 HDW ‐ 3

DX

C

L H

OPEN

HUMID

TEMP

HUMID

TEMP

OA SA

RA

1

2

L H

3

SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

H L

OPEN

TEMP

STPT

3HUM

TYPICAL FOR 8

4 SEE MECHANICAL SCHEDULES FOR STAGES

4

1 REFER TO CONDENSING UNIT WIRING DETAIL ON FOLLOWING PAGES.

2 USE A MINIMUM OF THREE (3) MOUNTING CLIPS PER AVERAGING SENSOR.

3 MOUNT SENSOR IN CONTROLLED SPACE.

4

SF VFD

BO

AO

SF CMD

DH ‐ 1

AI

DA TEMP

BO

EH RH 1

BO

EH RH 2

BO

DX STG 1

BO

DX STG 2

BI

SF STS

D

ODU ‐ 1

AI

RA CO2

AI

RA TEMP/HUMID

AI

AI

OA TEMP/HUMID

AI

AO

MA ACT

BI

FROSTSTAT

AHU

D

AI

PRESS

SPACE PRESS

OA PRESS

BI

FILT ALM

SPACE TEMP

SPACE HUMID

AI

CC LEV TEMP

(AHU ‐ 1)

Sequence of OperationsSZ VAV AHU – 1~8 Flow

Building Automation System Interface:The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the controller Occupied Bypass,Morning Warm‐up/Pre‐Cool, Occupied/Unoccupied and Heat/Cool modes. If a BAS isnot present, or communication is lost with the BAS the controller shall operate usingdefault modes and setpoints .

Occupied:During occupied periods, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside airdamper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements. The DX cooling andelectric heat shall stage to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. Ifeconomizing is enabled the outside air damper shall modulate to maintain the dischargeair temperature setpoint. The discharge air temperature setpoint shall be dynamicallyreset based on the deviation of actual space temperature from the active spacetemperature setpoint. If the discharge air temperature sensor fails the DX cooling andelectric heat shall stage to maintain the active space temperature setpoint and an alarmshall be annunciated at the BAS. If the discharge air temperature sensor and the spacetemperature sensor fail the DX cooling and electric heat shall be disabled and an alarmshall be annunciated at the BAS.Unoccupied:When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60.0 deg. F(adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and theelectric heat shall be enabled. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupiedheating setpoint of 60.0 deg. F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0 deg. F (adj.)the supply fan shall stop and the electric heat shall be disabled.When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of85.0 deg. F(adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing isenabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the DX cooling shall beenabled. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of85.0 deg. F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fanshall stop, the DX cooling shall be disabled and the outside air damper shall close.Optimal Start:The BAS shall monitor the scheduled occupied time, occupied space setpoints and spacetemperature to calculate when the optimal start occurs.

Morning Warm‐Up Mode:During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint amorning warm‐up mode shall be activated. When morning warm‐up is initiated the unitshall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed.When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shalltransition to the occupied mode.Pre‐Cool Mode:During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint,pre‐cool mode shall be activated. When pre‐cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fanand cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unlesseconomizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), theunit shall transition to the occupied mode.Optimal Stop:The BAS shall monitor the scheduled unoccupied time, occupied setpoints and spacetemperature to calculate when the optimal stop occurs. When the optimal stop mode isactive the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the spacetemperature offset setpoint. Outside air damper shall remain enabled to provideminimum ventilation.Occupied Bypass:The BAS shall monitor the status of the “on” and “cancel” buttons of the spacetemperature sensor. When an occupied bypass request is received from a space sensor,the unit shall transition from its current occupancy mode to occupied bypass mode andthe unit shall maintain the space temperature to the occupied setpoints (adj.).

Heat/Cool Mode:When the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint the mode shalltransition to cooling. When the space temperature falls below the occupied heatingsetpoint the mode shall transition to heating. When the space temperature is abovethe occupied cooling setpoint or below the occupied heating setpoint the mode shallremain in its last state. If the space temperature sensor fails the mode shall remain inits last state and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. If the local andcommunicated setpoints fail the controller shall disable the supply fan and an alarmshall be annunciated at the BAS.

Supply Air Temperature Reset Control:On a rise in space temperature (+2.0 deg. F adj. or greater) above the space coolingsetpoint (74.0 deg. F adj.); the supply fan speed shall modulate from minimum (50%adj.) to maximum (or design) air flow to maintain space cooling temperature setpointwhile keeping the discharge air temperature setpoint at minimum (55.0 deg. F adj.).As space temperature decreases below 76.0 deg. F (space cooling setpoint 74.0 deg. F +2.0 deg. F); the fan speed shall be locked at minimum air flow and the discharge airtemperature setpoint remains at minimum.When space temperature decreases to 75.0 deg. F (cooling setpoint of 74.0 deg. F adj. +1.0 deg. F) or below for a period of time (default 1 min. adj.); the fan speed shall remainat minimum, the discharge air temperature setpoint remains at minimum, and controlenters into discharge air temperature setpoint reset mode.As space temperature continues to drop below 75.0 deg. F (space temperature coolingsetpoint + 1.0 deg. F); the fan speed shall remain at minimum and the discharge airtemperature setpoint shall be reset from minimum (55.0 deg. F adj.) to maximum (65.0deg. F adj.) as space temperature drops from 75.0 deg. F to 74.0 deg. F to maintain thespace cooling temperature setpoint.On a continued drop of space temperature below the space cooling temperaturesetpoint (74.0 deg. F adj.) through (71.0 deg. F adj.) the space temperature control shallbe within its deadband; the fan speed remains at minimum and discharge air setpoint of(65.0 deg. F adj.) for cooling.As space temperature decreases to the heating setpoint (71.0 deg. F adj.) the controlshall switch to the heating discharge air temperature reset. In the heating mode, thestaged heat will be enabled; the supply fan shall remain at minimum air flow and thedischarge air temperature setpoint shall be reset from 70.0 deg. F to 90.0 deg. F as thespace temperature drops from 71.0 deg. F to 70.0 deg. F.As space temperature continues to decrease to heating setpoint (71.0 deg. F adj.) ‐ 1.0deg. F; the discharge air temperature setpoint shall remain at maximum (90.0 deg. Fadj.), the fan shall be modulated from minimum to maximum air flow to maintain thespace temperature heating setpoint.When the space temperature increases the reverse control shall be implemented.Occupied Humidity Control:If the space relative humidity is greater than 50% (adj.), the DX cooling shall stage tomaintain space relative humidity setpoint of 50% (adj.) and the electric heat shall stageto maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. Mode shall terminate when thespace relative humidity falls below the relative humidity setpoint of 50% (adj.) minus 3%(adj.). If the space relative humidity sensor fails, the dehumidification sequence shall beterminated and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.Economizer:The discharge air temperature sensor shall measure the dry bulb temperature of the airleaving the cooling coil while economizing. When economizing is enabled and the unit isoperating in the cooling mode, the economizer damper shall be modulated between itsminimum position and 100% to maintain the space temperature setpoint. Theeconomizer damper shall modulate toward minimum position in the event the mixed airtemperature falls below the low temperature limit setting.Comparative Enthalpy:Outside air (OA) enthalpy shall be compared with Return air (RA) enthalpy point.The economizer shall enable when OA enthalpy is less than RA enthalpy ‐ 2.0 BTU/LB.The economizer shall disable when OA enthalpy is greater than RA enthalpy.Demand Control Ventilation:When the input CO2 Concentration setpoint (adj.) is reached, the economizershall start to modulate open to bring in more fresh air to reduce the space CO2 level.The outside air damper shall modulate open in small increments until the space CO2level is satisfied or the outside air damper reaches the full open position. If the inputCO2 Concentration falls, the outside air damper shall modulate toward normaleconomizer operation. If the mixed air temperature drops below the mixed air low limitsetpoint the space CO2 sensor input is overridden and modulates the outside airdamper closed to maintain the mixed air temperature low limit setpoint. When themixed air temperature rises above the mixed air low limit setpoint, CO2 operation isonce again restored.Supply Fan:The supply fan shall be enabled while in the occupied mode and cycled on during theunoccupied mode. The unit controller shall vary the supply fan speed to optimizeminimum fan speed in all cooling and heating modes. A differential pressure switchshall monitor the differential pressure across the fan. If the switch does not open within30 seconds after a request for fan operation a fan failure alarm shall be annunciated,the unit shall stop, requiring a manual reset.

Space Pressure Control:The exhaust fan shall be enabled when the supply fan is running and the space static isgreater than the space static setpoint0.08 inches of W.C.(adj.). When enabled theexhaust fan shall modulate between minimum speed (default of 25%) and maximumspeed (100%) to maintain the space static setpoint, but limited to not exceed the supplyfan speed. When the space pressure falls below setpoint by 0.03 inches of W.C. and theexhaust fan speed is at or below minimum speed, the fan shall be disabled.Upon space static pressure sensor failure, the exhaust fan shall be enabled based onoutdoor air damper position greater than exhaust fan Outdoor Air Damper EnableSetpoint BAS of 25% (adj.). The exhaust fan speed shall track the outdoor air damperposition, but not to exceed the supply fan speed.Filter Status:A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filterwhen the fan is running. If the switch closes during normal operation a dirty filter alarmshall be annunciated at the BAS.

LA ENOIS N

121939

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA




CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:41:32 PM

M4.1

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

MECHANICALCONTROLS 1

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

EA

H L

OPEN

DX

C

STG 2

STG 1

SPD

SKT ‐ 7

HUMID

TEMP

HUMID

TEMP

1

SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OA SA

RA

STG 1

STG 2

L H

OPEN

TEMP

STPT

1 MOUNT SENSOR IN RETURN AIR DUCT.

TYPICAL FOR 2(SZ VAV RTU)

EA ‐ 1

BI

FILT STS

DH ‐ 2

BO

BO

D

SF VFD

AO

AI

OA TEMP/HUMIDITY

AI

AI

RA TEMP/HUMIDITY

AI

D

D

AO

RA/OA ACT

SZ VAV RTU 1 ~ 2

BO

BO

AI

SA TEMPBI

SF STS

AI

RA CO2SPACE SENSORS

No Project InformationSZ VAV RTU RTU ‐ 1

Sequence of OperationsSZ VAV RTU Flow

Building Automation System Interface:The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the controller Occupied Bypass,Morning Warm‐up / Pre‐Cool, Occupied / Unoccupied and Heat / Cool modes. If a BAS isnot present, or communication is lost with the BAS the controller shall operate usingdefault modes and setpoints.

Occupied Mode:During occupied periods, the supply fan shall run continuously and the outside airdamper shall open to maintain minimum ventilation requirements. The DX cooling andelectric heat shall stage to maintain the occupied space temperature setpoint. Ifeconomizing is enabled the outside air damper shall modulate to maintain the occupiedspace temperature setpoint.Unoccupied Mode:When the space temperature is below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 60.0 deg. F(adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall remain closed and theelectric heat shall be enabled. When the space temperature rises above the unoccupiedheating setpoint of 60.0 deg. F (adj.) plus the unoccupied differential of 4.0 deg. F (adj.)the supply fan shall stop and the electric heat shall be disabled.When the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint of 85.0 deg. F(adj.) the supply fan shall start, the outside air damper shall open if economizing isenabled and remain closed if economizing is disabled and the DX cooling shall beenabled. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint of85.0 deg. F (adj.) minus the unoccupied differential of 4.0 deg. F (adj.) the supply fanshall stop, the DX cooling shall be disabled and the outside air damper shall close.Optimal Start:The BAS shall monitor the scheduled occupied time, occupied space setpoints and spacetemperature to calculate when the optimal start occurs.

Morning Warm‐Up Mode:During optimal start, if the space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint amorning warm‐up mode shall be activated. When morning warm‐up is initiated the unitshall enable the heating and supply fan. The outside air damper shall remain closed.When the space temperature reaches the occupied heating setpoint (adj.), the unit shalltransition to the occupied mode.Pre‐Cool Mode:During optimal start, if the space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint,pre‐cool mode shall be activated. When pre‐cool is initiated the unit shall enable the fanand cooling or economizer. The outside air damper shall remain closed, unlesseconomizing. When the space temperature reaches occupied cooling setpoint (adj.), theunit shall transition to the occupied mode.Optimal Stop:The BAS shall monitor the scheduled unoccupied time, occupied setpoints and spacetemperature to calculate when the optimal stop occurs. When the optimal stop mode isactive the unit controller shall maintain the space temperature to the spacetemperature offset setpoint.

Occupied Bypass:The BAS shall monitor the status of the “on” and “cancel” buttons of the spacetemperature sensor. When an occupied bypass request is received from a space sensor,the unit shall transition from its current occupancy mode to occupied bypass mode andthe unit shall maintain the space temperature to the occupied setpoints (adj.).

Cooling Mode:The unit controller shall monitor space temperature and space temperature coolingsetpoint to determine when to initiate requests for cooling. When the spacetemperature rises above the space temperature cooling setpoint, the unit controllershall modulate the economizer or stage the mechanical cooling On or Off as required tomaintain the space temperature cooling setpoint. The first compressor shall energizeafter its minimum 3‐minute off time has expired. The supply fan shall modulate aboveminimum speed to meet zone requirements. If additional cooling capacity is requiredthe next stage of cooling shall be enabled. Once the space temperature falls below thesetpoint the compressors shall be deactivated and the fan shall modulate to minimumspeed.

Heating Mode:The unit controller shall monitor space temperature and space temperature heatingsetpoint to determine when to initiate requests for heat. When the space temperaturedrops below the space temperature heating setpoint, the controller shall enable the firststage of heat. If additional heating capacity is required the second stage of heat shall beenabled. The supply fan will remain at 100% during heating operation. Once the spacetemperature rises above the setpoint, the heating stages shall be disabled and thesupply fan speed will vary according to ventilation and cooling modes.

Economizer Control / Comparative Enthalpy:The supply air sensor shall measure the dry bulb temperature of the air leaving theevaporator coil while economizing. When economizing is enabled and the unit isoperating in the cooling mode, the economizer damper shall modulate between itsminimum position and 100% to maintain the space temperature setpoint. Minimumposition shall be calculated based on supply fan speed. If the supply air temperaturestarts to fall below supply air temperature setpoint, the outdoor damper shall be atminimum position. Compressors shall be delayed from operating until the economizerhas opened to 100% for 5 minutes.Comparative Enthalpy:Outside air enthalpy is compared with return air enthalpy point. The economizershall be enabled when outdoor air enthalpy is less than return air enthalpy ‐ 3.0 BTU/LB.The economizer shall be disabled when outdoor air enthalpy is greater than return airenthalpy.Demand Control Ventilation (DCV):As the supply fan speed command varies between minimum and maximum, the BuildingDesign and DCV Minimum Position Targets shall be calculated linearly between the userselected setpoints based on the instantaneous supply fan speed. The Bldg. Design andDCV Minimum Position Targets will be used to calculate the Active OA DamperMinimum Position Target based on CO2 levels relative to the active Design and DCV CO2setpoints.The Design Minimum and DCV Minimum OA Damper Position setpoints at Minimum FanSpeed Command and the Design Minimum OA Damper Position setpoint at Middle FanSpeed Command shall have a range of0‐100% while the Design Minimum and DCVMinimum OA Damper Position setpoints at Full fan speed shall have a range of 0‐50%.Note: On non‐Single Zone VAV units, a 10% offset shall be enforced between the Designand DCV Minimum Positions throughout the fan speed range.Supply Fan Operation:The supply fan shall be enabled while in the occupied mode and cycled on during theunoccupied mode. The unit controller shall vary the supply fan speed to optimizeminimum fan speed in all cooling modes. A differential pressure switch shall monitor thedifferential pressure across the fan. If the switch does not open within 40 seconds aftera request for fan operation a fan failure alarm shall be annunciated, the unit shall stop,requiring a manual reset.Building Pressure Control:The barometric relief dampers shall open with increased building pressure. As thebuilding pressure increases, the pressure in the unit return section also increases,opening the dampers and relieving air.

Filter Status:A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filterwhen the fan is running. If the switch closes for 2 minutes after a request for fanoperation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS.

FAN COMMANDFAN RUN STATUS

EXHAUST FANS

S/AR/A

UNIT CONTROL PANEL

SPACE TEMPSPACE TEMP(°F)

THERMOSTAT

DX

DUCTLESS MINISPLIT

D isc ha rg e Air Te m p er at ru e

EXHAUST FAN CONTROLS:

A. EXHAUST FAN OPERATION SHALL BE DICTATED BY THE BAS SYSTEM UNDER A TIME OF DAY SCEHDULE UNLESSINTERLOCKED WITH AN AIR HANDLER SYSTEM IN WHICH CASE THE AIR HANDLER OF OPERATION SHALLDICTATE OPERATION. THE FAN SHALL RUN ANYTIME THE UNIT IS COMMANDED TO RUN, AFTER THE DAMPERSTATUS HAS PROVEN (IF APPLICABLE), UNLESS SHUTDOWN ON SAFETIES. THE BAS SHALL MONITOR THE FANSTATUS.

B. ANY EXHAUST FAN CURRENTLY ON SWITCHES TO REMAIN, BUT NO TO BE DISABLED OUTSIDE OF OCCUPIEDSCHEDULE.

T /H

T /H

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS: COMPUTER ROOM MONITORING

A. SPACE TEMPERATURE MONITORING: THE BAS CONTROLLER SHALL MONITORTHE COMPUTER ROOM SPACE TEMPERATURE AND GENERATE ALARM IF THESPACE TEMPERATURE GOES OUT ± 2°F FROM NORMAL OPERATING SETPOINT INITIALLY AT 72° F (ADJ.) VIA BMS SYSTEM.

LA ENOIS N

121939

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA




CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:41:33 PM

M4.2

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

MECHANICALCONTROLS 2

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

1

1

2

3

3

A. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING MAIN POWER SERVICES ANDCOORDINATE WITH POWER COMPANY FOR ALL NEW REQUIREMENTS AND ALLCOST ASSOCIATED. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ANY COST FOR THE NEWTRANSFORMER AND OTHER ASSOCIATED FEES IN BID. CONTRACTOR ISRESPONSIBLE TO VERIFY ALL FEES WITH POWER COMPANY AND TO INCLUDE INBID. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO COORDINATE WITH POWER COMPANY ASSOON THE CONTRACT IS AWARDED TO ORDER TRANSFORMER AND THE RELATEDELECTRICAL SERVICE EQUIPMENT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

B. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL EXCAVATION, TRENCHING ANDBACKFILLING. COORDINATE WITH ALL UTILITIES PRIOR TO EXCAVATION.

C. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING MAIN TELEPHONE SERVICES ANDCOORDINATE WITH TELEPHONE COMPANY FOR ALL REQUIREMENTS AND ALLCOST ASSOCIATED. INCLUDE ALL COST IN BID. CONDUIT FROM MAIN TELEPHONERISER SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.

D. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OUTDOORS SHALL BE RATED TYPE NEMA 3R UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED.

E. CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE A WORKING KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CODES ANDORDINANCES. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODESAND ALL OTHER AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. OBTAIN PERMITS AND PAYALL FEES. PERFORM MODIFICATIONS TO MEET CODE AND ORDINANCEREQUIREMENTS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER, ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER.VERIFY PRIOR TO BID DATE.

F. VERIFY AT JOB SITE THE EXACT LOCATIONS OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SUCH ASBEAMS, COLUMNS, ETC. TO LOCATE EQUIPMENT CONDUIT, PANELS AND DEVICES.IF DEVIATIONS FROM THE DRAWING ARE NECESSARY TO MEET STRUCTURALCONDITIONS MAKE DEVIATIONS WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST, TO OWNER,ARCHITECT, OR ENGINEER.

M. ALL SLEEVES, PENETRATIONS, ETC. SHALL BE SEALED SOLID NON-SHRINKINGMATERIAL IMMEDIATELY UPON FILLING OF THE OPENING WITH PIPE OR CONDUIT.

H. GROUND ENTIRE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THENATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.

I. VERIFY AT JOB SITE GENERAL WORK TO BE DONE AS SPECIFIED, AS NOTED, OR ASREQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF BIDS.

J. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND EQUIPMENT TO BEREMOVED AND REPLACED BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS BID.

N. ARRANGE FOR SOURCES OF TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SERVICES. SUCHSERVICES SHALL BE NOMINALLY 120/240V, 1-PHASE, 3-WIRE FROM WHICH ACOMPLETE SYSTEM OF TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING SHALL BE PROVIDEDFOR ALL CONSTRUCTION NEEDS.

K. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND SMALL SCALE ONLY. THEYCONVEY THE INTENT OF THE WORK BUT DO NOT SHOW DETAIL SUCH ASJUNCTION AND PULL BOXES REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS AND THENATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE(NEC). PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS AND METHODSCALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND AS REQUIRED IN THE NEC TO PROVIDEA COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF ALL WORK.

L. ALL WIRING SHALL BE COPPER.

G. IN COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS, DETERMINE THE EXACT LOCATIONOF EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES AND CONNECTIONS THERETO BY REFERENCE TO THESUBMITTALS AND ROUGH-IN DRAWINGS, AND BY MEASUREMENTS AT THE SITE.REFER TO ALL OTHER TRADES SUBMITTAL FOR ELECTRICAL INFORMATION.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES (TO ALL SHEETS)

O. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH EXISTING/NEWUNDERGROUND UTILITIES PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

P. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE CALL DIG-TESS; 1-1800-DIG-TESS 2-BUSINESS DAYSIN ADVANCE.

KEYED NOTES: ELECTRICAL1

NEW INGRADE COMMUNICATION BOX. REFER TO DETAIL.

2

CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL COST TO BORE EXISTING SURFACE FORNEW CONDUITS. FIELD COORDINATE EXISTING UTILITIES PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

3

COORDINATE WITH OWNER FOR EXACT LOCATION OF EXISTING CONDUITS FORTHE TIE IN.

3

ES1.1

08/08/18


08/08/18

MEP ENGINEERING


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen

McAllen

1007 Walnut Ave.


V. 956.686.7771

F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/08/2018 6:30:09 PM

LM T

2017.16

PH

AS

E I &

P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

G

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

A

ND

A

DD

IT

IO

NS

Edinburg, T

exas

TR

OP

IC

AL T

EX

AS

B

EH

AV

IO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

00.00.0000

RE

VIS

IO

NS

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IP

TIO

N

03

8-08-18

Addendum

#5

17-20-18

01

7-20-18

Addendum

#1

N

1" = 60'-0"

1

ELECTRICAL - OVERALL SITE PLAN

ELECTRICAL

OVERALL

SITE PLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

LEONARDO MUNOZ

AutoCAD SHX Text

97437

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

1

1

1

1

1

2

3

EXEX

EXEXEX

EX

EX

EX

3

4

555

5 5 5

5 5 5

5 5 5

5 5 5

1

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

2

6

M.

L.

K.

J.

I.

H.

F.

G.

E.

D.

C.

A.

B.

WHERE CONDUITS RUN ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS OR IN WALLS WHICH ARE NOTPART OF DEMOLITION ARE TO REMAIN UNDISTURBED, CONDUCTORS SHALL BE REMOVEDAND THE CONDUITS CAPPED AND ABANDONED.

WHERE DEVICES OR EQUIPMENT ARE INDICATED OR REQUIRED TO BE RELOCATED, THEASSOCIATED BOXES, CONDUIT, AND CONDUCTORS SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO ACONCEALED JUNCTION BOX AND NEW PRODUCTS SHALL BE USED TO EXTEND THESERVICE TO THE NEW LOCATION.

WHERE THE REMOVAL OF DEVICES OR EQUIPMENT RENDERS EQUIPMENT DOWNSTREAMINOPERABLE, SERVICE SHALL BE EXTENDED TO THE DOWNSTREAM DEVICE OR EQUIPMENTSO THAT THE DEVICE OR EQUIPMENT IS LEFT IN OPERATING CONDITION.

COORDINATE DEMOLITION OF DIVISION 16 SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED WITH ALL OTHERTRADES.

ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT AND WIRING REMOVED DURINGCONSTRUCTION NO LONGER REQUIRED AS PART OF AN ACTIVE SYSTEM AND NOT TO BEREUSED SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE JOB SITE AND PROPERLY RETURNED TO THEOWNER, IF DESIRED BY OWNER.

WHERE EXISTING EQUIPMENT IS TO BE RELOCATED, EXTREME CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TOPREVENT DAMAGE DURING THE REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION. WHERE DAMAGEOCCURS, THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPLACED OR REPAIRED TO THE SATISFACTION ANDAPPROVAL OF THE ARCHITECT AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

EXISTING DEVICES AND/OR EQUIPMENT TO BE REUSED SHALL BE CLEANED ANDREPAIRED AT THE DISCRETION OF THE ARCHITECT WHERE APPLICABLE.

ALL DEVICES WITH AN "EX" SYMBOL ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN.

ALL DEVICES ATTACHED TO WALLS OR CEILINGS SHALL BE REMOVED PER DEMOLITIONNOTE A - L WHETHER SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR NOT.

PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION WORK REQUIRED FOR THE REMOVAL AND/OR RELOCATION OFELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED CONDUCTORS, CONDUIT, BOXES, ETC. TOPROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT.

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REVIEW THE ARCHITECTURALDOCUMENTS IN ADDITION TO THE DIVISION 15 AND 16 DOCUMENTS TO DETERMINE THECOMPLETE SCOPE OF WORK.

WHERE DEVICES OR EQUIPMENT ARE INDICATED OR REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED, THEASSOCIATED BOXES, CONDUIT, AND CONDUCTORS SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO THEIRSOURCE.

THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION WORK IS INDICATED ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS ANDBY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION. A VISIT TO THE SITE WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROPERLYBID THE DEMOLITION WORK.

1

EXISTING WALL TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE ELECTRICAL OUTLETS, SWITCHES, DATAOR ANY ELECTRICAL ON WALL.

GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: (TO ALL SHEETS)

KEYED NOTES: DEMOLITION

2

EXISTING 277/480V, 3Ø, 4W PANEL "2H" LOCATION.

3

EXISTING 120/208V, 3Ø, 4W PANEL "2LA" LOCATION.

4

EXISTING 277/480V, 3Ø, 4W PANEL "4P" LOCATION.

5

REPLACE EXISTING FIXTURE WITH NEW FIXTURE AT EXISTING LOCATION. REFERTO REMODEL PLAN.

6

LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BE RELOCATED. REFER TO REMODEL PLAN.

EX

SYMBOL: DESCRIPTION:

DEMOLITION LEGEND

EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES AND LIGHTINGDEVICES TO REMAIN, REPLACE LAMPS ANDREPLACE LENS WHERE APPLICABLE. FIELDVERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND REFER TOARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS ANDELECTRICAL REMODEL PLANS.

LIGHT FIXTURES, LIGHTING DEVICES ANDCONDUITS SHALL BE REMOVED.

EX

EX EXEXISTING WIRING DEVICES AND DATAOUTLETS TO REMAIN. FIELD VERIFY EXISTINGCONDITIONS AND REFER TO ARCHITECTURALDOCUMENTS.

WIRING DEVICES AND CONDUITS SHALL BEREMOVED.

2

3

ED2.0

08/08/18


07/20/18

MEP ENGINEERING



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen

McAllen

1007 Walnut Ave.


V. 956.686.7771

F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

4:25:04 PM

MM MM

2017.16

PH

AS

E I &

P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

G

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

A

ND

A

DD

IT

IO

NS

Edinburg, T

exas

TR

OP

IC

AL T

EX

AS

B

EH

AV

IO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

RE

VIS

IO

NS

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IP

TIO

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

1

KEY PLAN

N

08/08/18

08/08/18

03

8-08-18

Addendum

#5

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

3


N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

2


N

ELECTRICAL DEMO

FLOOR PLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

LEONARDO MUNOZ

AutoCAD SHX Text

97437

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

A7

A7

A7

A7

A7E

A7

G2

H2

B2 B2

B2

B2

B2

B2 B2

B2

B2

B2 B2

B2

B2

B2 B2

B2

B2

B2 B2

B2

B2

B2

OS2

OS2

OS2

OS2

OS2

OS2

CC2 CC2

CC2

CC2

CC2CC2

CC2

CC2

WR-2

WR-21

1

2

LCP

LCP

X4E

E

E

X4

X4

WR-1

2

E

E

E3

E3

E3

3

3

3

3

LA ENOIS N

LEONARDO MUNOZ

97437

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:00:02 PM

E1.6

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

ELECTRICALLIGHTING PLAN -STORAGE

1/4" = 1'-0" 1ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN - STORAGE

GENERAL NOTES- LIGHTING

A. VERIFY CEILING TYPES AND COORDINATE WITH FIXTURE TYPE LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH CEILINGTYPE AS INDICATED ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS. NOTIFY ENGINEER IF DISCREPANCIES EXIST PRIOR TOORDERING FIXTURES.

B. COORDINATE EXACT ROUTING OF ALL CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING IN BUILDING. TYPICAL FOR ALL BUILDING EXTERIORLIGHTING.

C. COORDINATE LOCATION OF LIGHTS WITH DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES.D. SWITCH LEGS ARE NOT SHOWN WHERE SWITCHING SCHEME IS OBVIOUS.E. ALL EXIT FIXTURES TYPE-"X1 & X2", EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE-"E" AND ALL EMERGENCY BALLAST SHALL BE

ON CIRCUIT "L1-12". FIXTURE TYPE LABEL WITH AN "_E" ARE LIGHT FIXTURES WITH EMERGENCY BALLAST. REFER TOLIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

F. ALL LIGHT SWITCHES, DIMMERS, LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE WALL PLATE SHALL INCLUDE LIGHTING CIRCUITNUMBER.

ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES

1 RELAY PANEL "LCP4". COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TOCOMMENCING ANY WORK.

2 VIA LCP4.3 PROVIDE DIGITAL OVERRIDE SWITCH FOR LIGHTING RELAY PANEL.

PROGRAM SWITCH WITH TIME AND/OR DIM FUNCTIONS PER OWNERDIRECTIONS.

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

3

A2

4

3

3

A2 A2 A2 A2

A2A2A2A2A2

A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

A2 A2 A2 A2 A2

EX

EX

EX

EX

2

1

EX

2

2

TIE INTO EXISTING LIGHTING CIRCUIT AND SWITCHING METHOD, NEW WIRE SHALL BE2#12, 1#12G, 1/2" C. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCINGANY WORK.

1

LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE RELOCATED AS NEEDED TO ACCOMMODATENEW CEILING.

D. COORDINATE LOCATION OF LIGHTS WITH DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES.

C. COORDINATE EXACT ROUTING OF ALL CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING IN BUILDING.TYPICAL FOR ALL BUILDING EXTERIOR LIGHTING.

B. VERIFY CEILING TYPES AND COORDINATE WITH FIXTURE TYPE LIGHT FIXTURE SHALLBE COMPATIBLE WITH CEILING TYPE AS INDICATED ON THE ARCHITECTURALDOCUMENTS. NOTIFY ENGINEER IF DISCREPANCIES EXIST PRIOR TO ORDERINGFIXTURES.

A. ALL EXIT FIXTURES/EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BECONNECTED TO UNSWITCHED OR NON-DIMMING HOT LEG OF SAMEVOLTAGE/PHASE OF LOCAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT IN SPACE.

E. SWITCH LEGS ARE NOT SHOWN WHERE SWITCHING SCHEME IS OBVIOUS.

GENERAL NOTES: LIGHTING

KEYED NOTES: LIGHTING

F. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO EQUIPMENT SUBMITTAL FOR ALL ELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY WORK.

3

PROVIDE NEW LIGHT SWITCH AT NEW LOCATION TO CONTROL EXISTINGCORRIDOR LIGHTING. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS.

4

ROUTE TO EXISTING PANEL "2H". PROVIDE 1-20 AMP, 120V, 1-POLE BREAKER. PROVIDE2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C DIMMING CONDUCTORS. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONSPRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY WORK.

2

3

E1.7

08/08/18


07/20/18

MEP ENGINEERING



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen

McAllen

1007 Walnut Ave.


V. 956.686.7771

F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

4:25:04 PM

MM MM

2017.16

PH

AS

E I &

P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

G

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

A

ND

A

DD

IT

IO

NS

Edinburg, T

exas

TR

OP

IC

AL T

EX

AS

B

EH

AV

IO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

RE

VIS

IO

NS

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IP

TIO

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

1

KEY PLAN

N

08/08/18

08/08/18

03

8-08-18

Addendum

#5

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

3


N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

2


N

ELECTRICAL

FLOOR PLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

LEONARDO MUNOZ

AutoCAD SHX Text

97437

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

J

PS

PS

PS

PS

PS

PS

PS

J

PS

PS

PS

J

J

PS

PSPS

PS

J

J

J

PS

FACP

S

MATCHLINE A

MATCHLINE B

MATCHLINE A

MATCHLINE B

HRDIRECTOR

H113

OPENOFFICE

H112

STAFFDEVELOPMENT

H111

COMPLIANCEH114

WOMENC101

LVNH110

PROTECTEDLEAVEH109

PROTECTEDLEAVEH108

BENEFITSH106

BENEFITSH105

HRMANAGER

H103

OPENOFFICE

Q103

RECRUITMENTH115


H116

INTERVIEWERH117

MECHANICALC113

MENC100

INTERVIEWROOMH107

STORAGEH104

QADIRECTOR

Q109

QA ADMINASSISTANT

Q110

SPECIALISTQ111

QA NURSEQ112

LOBBY102

CUST.C105

IDFC106

WOMENC104

VESTIBULE101

HR ADMINASSISTANT

H100

HALL104

ALCOVE106

ENTRYALCOVE

100

CONFERENCEQ104

HALL110

HALL112

HALL111

MENC103

HALL108

HALL107

EDF.105

BDDIRECTOR

Q101

DRYSTORAGE

C102

BREAK R./ COPY R.

H102

BD ADMINASSISTANT

Q100

BDOFFICE

Q102

+42"+42"

EVALUATORQ108

EVALUATORQ107

COMMUNITYRELATION

Q105

MAILROOMH101

VENDING109

ACAC AC AC AC

C1

R1

L1

TX-R1

R1-2

R1-4

R1-7

R1-8

R1-9

R1-10

R1-11

R1-12

+42"

+42"

TV

R1-13

C1-23

R1-15

E2.61

TX-WR

WR

R1-18R1-17R1-16

R1-19

R1-20

R1-21

R1-22

R1-23R1-24

R1-25

R1-26

R1-27R1-28

CLOSETQ106

R1-30

R1-29

R1-32

R1-31

C1-1

C1-2

C1-3

C1-4

C1-5

C1-6

C1-7

C1-8

C1-9C1-20

C1-19 C1-18

C1-21

R1-33

C1-22

R1-34

R1-35

R1-36

1

1

E2.22

TVC1-17

8

(S.C.)R1-40

(S.C.)R1-41

8

8

(S.C.)R1-41

8

(S.C.)R1-41

8

8

(S.C.)R1-41

(S.C.)R1-418

99 10

910

11

R1-42

TV

C1-27

11

(S.C.)C1-2912

1313

11

14

WL

(S.C.)R1-40

(S.C.)R1-40

(S.C.)R1-40

(S.C.)R1-40

R1-6

(S.C.)C1-29

(S.C.)C1-29

(S.C.)C1-29

12

12

12

15

15

15~

~

~

(S.C.)R1-41

8

TV

C1-3011

C1-10

C1-14

C1-12

C1-13C1-11

IDFC106

C1-15

2

3

4

5

6

C1-25

C1-24

C1-16

2

7

LA ENOIS N

LEONARDO MUNOZ

97437

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:00:14 PM

E2.2

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

ELECTRICAL POWERPLAN -AREA "A"

1/8" = 1'-0" 1ELECTRICAL POWER FLOOR PLAN - AREA "A"

GENERAL NOTES- POWER

A. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ALL POWER SOURCEWIRING IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK.

B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO H.V.A.CEQUIPMENT, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR WIRE SIZE.

C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE STARTERS, RELAYS, CONTACTORS ANDTHE REQUIRED ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM ASREQUIRED.

D. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCEW/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS TO MEET ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIREDCLEARANCE BY THE LATEST CODE.

E. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ISOLATED OUTLETS FOR COMPUTERS WITHOWNER.

F. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE J-BOX AND CONDUIT FOR H.V.A.C.CONTROLS AND THERMOSTATS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICALCONTRACTOR.

G. NEMA RATED OUTLETS, REFER TO BREAKER SIZE AND COORDINATE WITHEQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO BID.

H. ALL RECEPTACLES AND WIRING DEVICES SHALL INCLUDE STAINLESS STEELWALLPLATE WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER.

ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES

1 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH PLUMBER TO CONCEAL CORD BEHINDELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN PRIOR TO ANY ROUGH-IN.

2 PROVIDE ISOLATED GROUND L5-30 FOR RACK CIRCUIT. COORDINATE EXACTLOCATION PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

3 3/4"X8'HX4'W PLYWOOD TELEPHONE BOARD FINISHED ONE SIDE. PROVIDEGROUND BAR AND TIE INTO ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM VIA WIRE #4.

4 SECURITY PANEL CIRCUIT.5 PROVIDE GROUND BAR 24"AFF, REFER TO DETAIL.6 ACCESS CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT.7 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT.8 J-BOX FOR ACCESS CONTROL POWER SUPPLY. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION

WITH SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

9 ROUTE THROUGH NEAREST FULL WALL. ALL CONDUIT MUST BE CONCEALED INWALL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS. COORDINATE WITHCONTRACTOR PRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY WORK.

10 SAW CUT AND PATCH EXISTING CONCRETE TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS.FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TOCOMMENCING ANY WORK.

11 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ANYROUGH-INS.

12 PROVIDE J-BOX FOR DOOR RELEASE. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITHSUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

13 PROVIDE RELEASE PUSHBUTTON FOR 4 DOORS AND LABEL EACH BUTTON FOR ITSRESPECTIVE DOOR. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TOCOMMENCING ANY WORK.

14 DISCONNECT FOR TX-R2 TO BE LOCATED WITHIN 5'-0" OF TX-R2.15 ROUTE BACK TO SWITCHES IN ROOM Q100 AND H100.

1/4" = 1'-0" 2ELECTRICAL POWER FLOOR PLAN - AREA "A" - IDF

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

17

-20-

1 8A

dden

dum

#1

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

3

TV

TV

TV

TV

TV

TV

DCDCDC

DC DCCRCR

PSPS

KPKP MDMDT

T

JPS

CR

TV

+42"

AC

AC

BC

+42"

+42"

+42"

AC

AC AC

AC

AC

ACAC AC

LC

RC

TX-RC

RC-11

RC-12

RC-13

RC-10 RC-8

RC-14

RC-15

RC-7

RC-4 RC-5 RC-6

RC-3

RC-18

RC-1

RC-2

11

RC2-1

RC2-2

RC2-6

RC2-8RC2-7

RC2-9

RC2-22

RC2-14

RC2-24

RC2-13

RC2-11RC2-1211

RC2-10

RC2-15

RC2-16

RC2-21

RC2-3

RC2-4

RC2-5 RC2-19RC2-18

2

2

2

2

LC2

TX-RC2 RC2

RC2-17

TV

TV

TV

TV

TV

RC-19

RC-16

RC-17

RC-22

RC-21

RC-20

TV

TV

TV

TV

TV

RC-23

RC-24

WH-4

WH-3

RC2-25

RC-25

RC2-26

3 3RC-27

444

444

444444

444

EF-11

EF-10

RC-30

RC-29

RC-28

55

6

EF-9

78

EF-8

RC2-27

EF-5

7

EF-12

8

AC

9RC2-28

3 10

11

TV

TV

(S.C.)RC2-29

444

TVTV

(S.C.)RC2-29

444

CONFERENCECENTERA100A

STOR.A101

SERVERYA104

BUFFETCOUNTER

A100B

CORRIDORA102

JANITORA105

SERVERYA104

MENA106

WOMENA107

UNISEXRR

B116

OFFICEB112

IDFB115

CORRIDORB103

BREAKROOMB114

OFFICEB110

STOR.B111

STOR.B106

JANITORB109

STOR.B108 STOR.

B113

OFFICEB107

RECEPTIONISTB104

WAITINGAREAB100

UNISEXRR

B102

CONFERENCEROOMB105

EDFB101

12

12

33

LA ENOIS N

LEONARDO MUNOZ

97437

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:00:20 PM

E2.5

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

POWER ENLARGEDPLAN - LOCAL 1 & 2

1/4" = 1'-0" 1POWER ENLARGED PLAN - LOCAL 1 & 2

GENERAL NOTES- POWER

A. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ALL POWER SOURCEWIRING IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK.


C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE STARTERS, RELAYS, CONTACTORS ANDTHE REQUIRED ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM ASREQUIRED.

D. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCEW/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS TO MEET ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIREDCLEARANCE BY THE LATEST CODE.


F. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE J-BOX AND CONDUIT FOR H.V.A.C.CONTROLS AND THERMOSTATS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICALCONTRACTOR.


H. ALL RECEPTACLES AND WIRING DEVICES SHALL INCLUDE STAINLESS STEELWALLPLATE WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER.

ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES

1 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH PLUMBER TO CONCEAL CORDBEHIND ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN PRIOR TO ANY ROUGH-IN.

2 PROVIDE 1.5" CONDUIT FOR DATA, STUB UP IN WALL TO ABOVE CEILINGLEVEL.

3 J-BOX FOR ACCESS CONTROL POWER SUPPLY. COORDINATE EXACTLOCATION WITH SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

4 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ANYROUGH-INS.

5 VIA LCP2.6 PROVIDE A 120V, 20 AMP, SPRINGWOUND AUTO-OFF WALL TIMER

SWITCH, EQUAL TO MFR. INTERMATIC #FF60MHC.

7 TIE INTO ROOMS LIGHTING CIRCUIT AND INTERLOCK FAN WITH ROOMSLIGHTS. WIRING SHALL BE 2#12,#1#2G,12"C.

8 3/4"X8'HX4'W PLYWOOD TELEPHONE BOARD FINISHED ONE SIDE.PROVIDE GROUND BAR AND TIE INTO ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEMVIA WIRE #4.

9 PROVIDE RELEASE PUSHBUTTON. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITHOWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY WORK.

10 PROVIDE J-BOX FOR DOOR RELEASE. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONWITH SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

11 PROVIDE 3/4"C WITH CONTROL WIRING FOR OPERATION. CONTROLWIRING SHALL BE AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER.

12 PROVIDE ISOLATED GROUND L5-30 FOR RACK CIRCUIT. COORDINATEEXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

17

-20-

1 8A

dden

dum

#1

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

3

1 1

1 1

2

1 1

2

3

3

4

5

2

22

22 2 2

2 2

2 2

6

6

T

AHU-9

CU-9

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

2

1

J-BOX FOR DATA/TELEPHONE AND POWER POLE SERVING WORKSTATIONS. POWERPOLE SHALL BE A 2-COMPARTMENT POLE AND SHALL BE MFR. LEGRAND #AMDTP-412.COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF J-BOX WITH FURNITURE CONTRACTOR ANDEQUIPMENT SUPPLIER PRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY WORK. ALL CONDUIT MUST BECONCEALED. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

A. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ALL POWERSOURCE WIRING IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK.


C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE STARTERS, RELAYS, CONTACTORSAND THE REQUIRED ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM ASREQUIRED.

D. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INACCORDANCE W/MECHANICAL DRAWINGS TO MEET ELECTRICAL ANDMECHANICAL REQUIRED CLEARANCE BY THE LATEST CODE.


F. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE J-BOX AND CONDUIT FOR H.V.A.C.CONTROLS AND THERMOSTATS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITHMECHANICAL CONTRACTOR.


GENERAL NOTES: POWER

KEYED NOTES: POWER

H. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO EQUIPMENT SUBMITTAL FOR ALL ELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY WORK.

2

ROUTE TO EXISTING PANEL "2LA". PROVIDE 1-20 AMP, 120V, 1-POLE BREAKER. WIRESHALL BE 2#12, #12G, 1/2"C. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TOCOMMENCING ANY WORK.

3

EXISTING 277/480V, 3Ø, 4W PANEL "2H" LOCATION.

4

EXISTING 120/208V, 3Ø, 4W PANEL "2LA" LOCATION.

5

EXISTING 277/480V, 3Ø, 4W PANEL "4P" LOCATION.

6

ROUTE TO EXISTING PANEL "4P". PROVIDE 1-20 AMP, 480V, 3-POLE BREAKER. WIRESHALL BE 4#10, #10G, 3/4"C. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TOCOMMENCING ANY WORK.

2

3

E2.7

08/08/18


07/20/18

MEP ENGINEERING



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen

McAllen

1007 Walnut Ave.


V. 956.686.7771

F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

4:25:04 PM

MM MM

2017.16

PH

AS

E I &

P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

G

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

A

ND

A

DD

IT

IO

NS

Edinburg, T

exas

TR

OP

IC

AL T

EX

AS

B

EH

AV

IO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

RE

VIS

IO

NS

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IP

TIO

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

1

KEY PLAN

N

08/08/18

08/08/18

03

8-08-18

Addendum

#5

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

3


N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1' - 0"

2


N

ELECTRICAL

FLOOR PLAN

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

J

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

LEONARDO MUNOZ

AutoCAD SHX Text

97437

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

EXIT LIGHT SAME AS ABOVE, EXCEPT WITH AN EMERGENCY UNIT AS

LED, FLUORESCENT, OR HID FIXTURE WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK.

2'X2' LIGHT FIXTURE W/EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

2'X4' LIGHT FIXTURE W/EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

TRACK LIGHT WITH HEADS AS INDICATED

INCANDESCENT, LED, FLUORESCENT, OR HID FIXTURE CLG. OR WALL MTD,

INCANDESCENT, LED, FLUORESCENT, OR HID WALL WASHER LIGHT

STRIP UTILITY STRIP LIGHT WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK,

EXIT LIGHT, CEILING OR WALL MOUNTED - SHADING INDICATINGSINGLE OR DOUBLE FACE; DIRECTIONAL ARROWS AS INDICATED

---ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT APPEAR IN ALL DRAWINGS. SYMBOLS ARE SHOWN SCHEMATIC AND MAY NOT BE TO SCALE.

DOUBLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCH, 20A/120/277V

WALL DIMMER SWITCH

4-WAY WALL SWITCH, 20A,120/277V

3-WAY WALL SWITCH, 20A,120/277V

WALL SWITCH SPST, 20A,120/277V

STRIP UTILITY LIGHT FIXTURE, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

CLG. OR WALL MTD, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

2'x2' LIGHT FIXTURE, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

FIXTURE CEILING MTD, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

1'X4' LIGHT FIXTURE, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

2'x4' LIGHT FIXTURE, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

A COMBO, REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

CEILING FAN

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

ELECTRICAL LEGEND-LIGHTING

WALL SWITCH SPST, 20A,120/277V - PILOT LIGHT SWITCH

WALL SWITCH SPST, 20A,120/277V - KEYED SWITCH, X = 3 OR 4 WAY

REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE



HEAVY DUTY COMBINATION DISCONNECT/MOTOR STARTER

THERMOSTAT WALL MOUNTED - STUB 1/2"C ABOVE CEILING FROMOUTLET BOX. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND HEIGHT WITH

OR INSULATED GROUND. ALPHANUMERIC DESCRIPTION INDICATES

HATCH INDICATES NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR, LONG HATCHES INDICATE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND WIRE HOMERUN TO PANEL. SHORT

INDICATES NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR, LONG HATCHES INDICATE PHASECONDUCTORS, AND LONG HATCH WITH CIRCLE INDICATES ISOLATES

ISOLATED OR INSULATED GROUND. ALPHANUMERIC DESCRIPTION PHASE CONDUCTORS, AND LONG HATCH WITH CIRCLE INDICATES

CONDUIT AND WIRE HOMERUN TO PANEL. SHORT HATCH

WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET. FURNISH AND INSTALL1.25"C., WITH PULLSTRING AND INSULATED BUSHING, STUBBED ABOVE CEILING.+24" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTE. BOX TO BE MINIMUM 2 1/8" DEEP.

WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET. FURNISH AND INSTALL 1"C, WITH PULLSTRING AND INSULATED BUSHING, STUBBED ABOVE CEILING.

+24" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTE. BOX TO BE MINIMUM 2 1/8" DEEP., WITH PULLSTRING AND INSULATED BUSHING, STUBBED ABOVE CEILING.WALL MOUNTED DATA OUTLET. FURNISH AND INSTALL 1.25"C

+24" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTE. BOX TO BE MINIMUM 2 1/8" DEEP.

TELEVISION OUTLET. CLG. OR WALL MOUNTED - STUB 1" C.ABOVE CEILING FROM OUTLET BOX

PUSHBUTTON WALL MOUNTED.

PUBLIC TELEPHONE OUTLET.: J-BOX & 1"C P

MECHANCIAL DIVISION.

INDICATES PANEL AND BREAKER.

DETAIL NUMBER

SHEET NUMBER

HEAVY DUTY MOTOR STARTER

PANEL AND BREAKER.

ELECTRICAL CONDUIT

UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT

MULTI-POLE DEVICE CIRCUIT NUMBERS

THREE SINGLE POLE DEVICE CIRCUIT NUMBERS

SWITCH LEGPANELBOARD, CLEARANCE AS PER LATEST NEC

X, X, XX/X/X

MOTOR

HEAVY DUTY DISCONNECT SWITCH FUSED

HEAVY DUTY DISCONNECT SWITCH NONFUSED

PAD-X

FACP

FAAP

TIME CLOCK (MFR.TORK#7202Z)

LIGHTING CONTACTOR, NEMA-1, W/H.O.A. SWITCH

CIRCULATING PUMP

INTERCOM - CALL SWITCH- JBOX WITH 3/4"C

PHOTO CELL(MFR.INTERMATIC #K4136M)

CP-1

SD SD

ENCLOSED BREAKER, RE: TO SCH. FOR MORE INFO.---ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT APPEAR IN ALL DRAWINGS. SYMBOLS ARE SHOWN SCHEMATIC AND MAY NOT BE TO SCALE.

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

ELECTRICAL LEGEND-SPECIAL SYSTEMS


SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

ELECTRICAL LEGEND-FIRE ALARM


SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

ELECTRICAL LEGEND-GENERAL

A-1

A-1

THERMOSTAT,RE:DIV.15

FIRE

80"MAX.

CEILING

FINISHED FLOOR

CEILING

FINISHED FLOOR

CEILING

FINISHED FLOOR

48" MAX. UNLESS LOCATEDABOVE "OBSTRUCTION"

SUCH AS A COUTER, THEN42" MAXIMUM.

12" MAX. AND6" MIN.

4" MIN.

MOUNTING HEIGHT DETAIL

SWITCH

TELEPHONE OULETDATA OUTLET

RECEPTACLE

FIRE ALARM PULL SWITCH

FIRE ALARM STROBE/AUDIO

WALL MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR

PROVIDE 18"AFF UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED.

RECEPTACLE

DATA OUTLET

TELEPHONE OULET

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE(S)

SHARE CIRCUIT

SHUNT TRIP

UNDERFLOOR

SPACE ONLY

WIRE GUARD

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

UNDERGROUND

TRANSFORMER

WEATHERPROOF

CB CIRCUIT BREAKER

ABOVE COUNTER

GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER

NOT IN CONTRACT

GROUND (EQUIPMENT)

MOUNT OR MOUNTED

EMPTY CONDUIT

HT.ACNL

MOUNTINGHEIGHT

NIGHT LIGHT

MTD

GFI

NF

NICH.D

F

G

EC

EX

NONFUSED

HEAVY DUTY

FUSE

EXISTING

XFMR

UNO(U.N.O.)

ST (S.T.)

SO (S.O.)

UF

WG

WP

UG

SW

SP

SWITCH

SPARE

BELOW FINISHED CEILING

ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS:ABBV:

BFC

C

AFF

CONDUIT

(S.C.)

RCPT(S)

PNL PANEL

MAIN BREAKERMB

MAIN LUGS ONLYMLO

MTD.

FEEDERFDR.

RIGID METAL CONDUITRMC

RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUITRNC

ELECTRICAL METALLIC EMT

MANUFACTURERMFR.

CIRCUITCKT.

LIGHTINGLTG.

LIGHTING CONTACTORLC

EACHEA.TUBING CONDUIT

ISOLATED GROUNDIG

I.G. RECEPTACLE(S)CRCPT(S)

QUAD I.G. RECEPTACLE(S)QCRCPT(S)

QUAD RECEPTACLE(S)QRCPT(S)

SOLID NEUTRALS/NABOVE COUNTERAC

ALL OTHER MOUNTING HEIGHTS REFER TO CENTERLINE OF DEVICE.

48" AFF INDICATES TO TOP OF DEVICE;15" AFF INDICATES TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE;

AC INDICATES 6" ABOVE COUNTER TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE.

NOTES:

1.)

C

SECURITY DOOR CONTACT SENSOR - STUB 1/2"C ABOVE CEILING FROM OUTLET BOX

SECURITY GLASS BREAK SENSOR - STUB 1/2"C

SECURITY KEY PAD - STUB 3/4"C

SECURITY PANEL JUNCTION BOX

ABOVE CEILING FROM OUTLET BOX



SECURITY MOTION DETECTOR SENSOR - STUB 1/2"C

SEC 54"

ELECTRICAL LEGEND -WIRING DEVICES

CARD READER BOX - STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING LEVEL FROM OUTLET BOX

- - - -

MAGNETIC LOCK BOX - STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING LEVEL FROM OUTLET BOX

- - - -

SYSTEM BY OTHERS

SYSTEM BY OTHERS

ACCESS CONTROL PANEL JUNCTION BOX - BY OTHERSACC 54"


DESCRIPTION ABBV:

NEMA-1N1NEMA-3RN3RNEMA-4XN4X

SD

AV

V

F

H

DH

TS

FS

MINIMUM OF 4" SQUAREJUNCTION BOX - SIZE & MOUNTING AS REQUIRED

208V RECEPTACLE, VERIFY NEMA NO. WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

ISOLATED GROUND QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE

DUPLEX RCPT. GFI - 20A/125V/2P/3W/G NEMA 5-20R

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - 20A/125V/2P/3W/G NEMA 5-20R

SINGLE RECEPTACLE - 20A/125V/2P/3W/G NEMA 5-20R

ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - 20A/125V NEMA 5-20R

SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE (NEMA NO. AS INDICATED)

QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE

JJ

"IN-USE"WP/

HD J-BOX - AIR HAND DRYER: (RECESSED HAND DRYERS TO BEPROVIDED BY DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL)#B-750 AUTOMATICHANDCRAFT AS MANUFACTURER BY BOBRICK. (COLOR WHITE)QUANTITY: REFER TO DRAWINGS (MIN. ONE PER LAV. COMPLETE W/ELE. CONNECTIONS TYP.)

HH / HOSPITAL GRADE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE/GFI - 20A/125V/2P/3W/G NEMA 5-20R

ROTARY TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCH R

120/277-208/480V,20AMP, MOTOR RATED SWITCH, NEMA-1(INTERIOR)

CAMERA WITH NO J-BOX ONLY 3/4" CONDUIT - - - -

AUDIO VIDEO DROP, REFER TO DETAIL

AHUTHORITY HAVING AHJJURISDICTION

FIRE ALARM PULL STATION: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING FROM J-BOX

FIRE ALARM AUDIBLE/VISUAL SIGNAL: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING FROMJ-BOXFIRE ALARM VISUAL SIGNAL: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING FROM J-BOX

FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR CEILING OR WALL MOUNTED: STUB 3/4"CABOVE CEILING FROM J-BOXHEAT DETECTOR CEILING OR WALL MOUNTED: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILINGFROM J-BOX

DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING FROM J-BOX

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL, ADDRESSABLE, SURFACE MTD UNO, INCLUDEA FIRE DOCUMENT BOX EQUAL TO MFR. SPACE AGE ELECTRONICS#FDB-ACE-11.

FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL, FLUSH MOUNTED UNO

POWER SUPPLY, DEDICATED 110V

DOOR HOLDER DEVICE: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING FROM J-BOX

TAMPER SWITCH: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING FROM J-BOX

FLOW SWITCH: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILING FROM J-BOX

NOTE: VERIFY WITH ARCHITECTURAL FOR ADA REQUIREMENTS.

4-GANG FLOOR MOUNTED BOX, 2-DUPLEX RECEPTACLE(INCLUDERECEPTACLE WITH COVER PLATE)/2-GANG FOR DATA - FLUSHMOUNTED UNO FLOOR BOX = MFR.-HUBBELLMODEL#CFB4G30CR-24GCVRNK(COVER)-(2)FBMPDUP-FBMP6KS-CFBHB2(MULTISERVICE STEEL RECESSED FLOOR BOX-VERIFY FLOORFINISH PRIOR TO ORDER SAME BOX FOR DATA OUTLETS.

F FIRE ALARM OUTDOOR SPEAKER, WEATHER PROOF: STUB 3/4"C ABOVECEILING FROM J-BOX

INTERCOM/PAGING LAY-IN SPEAKER S

PA EXTERIOR SPEAKER 10'-6" AFF

INTRUSION EXTERIOR SPEAKER 10'-6" AFF

ALL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS SHOWN ON THIS LEGEND MAY NOTAPPEAR ON THIS SET OF DRAWINGS.

USE DIRECTIONAL ARROW ON EXIT SIGNS AS REQUIRED.

IEEE STANDARD C37.2-1991, ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM DEVICE FUNCTIONNUMBERS.

CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT INSTALL MORE THAN THREE CURRENT CARRYINGCONDUCTORS IN A COMMON RACEWAY. IF CONTRACTOR IS PLANNING ONGROUPING MULTIPLE CIRCUITS IN A SINGLE RACEWAY, THE CONTRCATORMUST SUBMIT ALL DERATING CALCULATIONS FOR THE PROPOSEDINSTALLATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC ARTICLE 310.15 (B) (2) FORAPPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. NON APPROVED INSTALLATIONS WILLBE REMOVED AND REINSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITHTHE NEC AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

THERE SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN THE EQUIVALENT OF THREE 90° BENDS(270 DEGREES TOTAL) BETWEEN PULL POINTS. WHERE THERE ARE MORETHAN THREE QUARTER BENDS, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PULL BOXESAS SPECIFIED AND SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC.

COMPLY WITH NEC REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. ALLELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL TO BE APPROVED, LISTED, LABELED,IDENTIFIED AND INSTALLED PER RECOGNIZED ELECTRICAL TESTINGLABORATORY.ALL RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES AND JUNCTION BOXES SERVED BYEMERGENCY BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE "RED" IN COLOR. COVERPLATESSHALL BE LABELED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS TO INDICATEPANELBOARD AND CIRCUIT NO. (IE: ET*LA-3).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES

SD SMOKE DETECTOR WITH AN AUDIBLE BASE: STUB 3/4"C ABOVE CEILINGFROM J-BOX

STAINLESS STEELSS

DUPLEX RCPT.,WEATHER RESISTANT "WR", GFI INSTALLED IN A"IN-USE" WEATHER PROOF STEEL ENCLOSURE- 20A/125V/2P/3W/GNEMA 5-20R WP/"IN-USE" SHALL BE EQUAL TO MFR. CARLON,METALLIC SERIES SINGLE GANG, VERTICAL MOUNT #ME9UVMGDOUBLE GANG, VERTICAL MOUNT #ME9U2VMG

ELECTRICAL DEVICE AS SHOWN ON PLANS SURFACE MOUNT RACEWAY.SURFACE MOUNT RACEWAY SHALL BE WIREMOLD #V700 SERIES.PROVIDE ALL RELATED #V700 SERIES ACCESSORIES FOR AN OPERABLESYSTEM.

FACP-EVS FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL WITH EMERGENCY VOICE SYSTEM,ADDRESSABLE, FLUSH MTD UNO, INCLUDE A FIRE DOCUMENT BOXEQUAL TO MFR. SPACE AGE ELECTRONICS #FDB-ACE-11.

V SFIRE ALARM CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER STROBE, UL LISTED, : J-BOX WITH 3/4"C

VS FIRE ALARM CEILING WALL MOUNT OUTDOOR SPEAKER STROBE, UL LISTED, :J-BOX WITH 3/4"C

ENCLOSURE, NEMA-3R(EXTERIOR) ENCLOSURE. VOLTAGE TO BE SELECTEDPER EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS.

EVES FIRE ALARM EMERGENCY VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM, FLUSH ORSURFACE.

6" FIRE RATED POKE-TRHOUGHS BOX, 2-DUPLEX RECEPTACLE(INCLUDERECEPTACLE WITH COVER PLATE)- MFR.-HUBBELLMODEL#S1R6PTFIT-S1R6SPE-S1R6SPL-S1R6SPH(50/50 DEVICE PLATECOMBINATION)-S1R6CVRALU(COVER) -VERIFY FLOOR FINISH PRIORTO ORDER SAME BOX FOR DATA OUTLETS.

6P

8P 8" FIRE RATED POKE-TRHOUGHS BOX, 2-DUPLEX RECEPTACLE(INCLUDERECEPTACLE WITH COVER PLATE)- MFR.-HUBBELLMODEL#S1R8PTFIT3-S1R8CSPK-S1R8CSPK-S1R8PSPZ(50/50 DEVICEPLATE COMBINATION)-S1R8CVRALU(COVER) -VERIFY FLOOR FINISHPRIOR TO ORDER SAME BOX FOR DATA OUTLETS.

COMMUNICATION CONDUIT AND WIRINGC

6-GANG FLOOR MOUNTED BOX, 2-DUPLEX RECEPTACLE(INCLUDERECEPTACLE WITH COVER PLATE)/2-GANG FOR DATA - FLUSHMOUNTED UNO FLOOR BOX = MFR.-HUBBELLMODEL#CFB6G30CR-CFBS1R8CVRALU(COVER)-(3)FBMPDUP-FBMP6KS-CFBHB2(MULTISERVICE STEEL RECESSED FLOOR BOX-VERIFY FLOORFINISH PRIOR TO ORDER SAME BOX FOR DATA OUTLETS.

6G

6" FIRE RATED POKE-TRHOUGHS BOX, FURNITURE FEED,- MFR.-HUBBELLMODEL#S1R6PTFFALU( ALUMINUM COVER) -VERIFY FLOOR FINISHPRIOR TO ORDER.

6JP

TAMPER PROOFT

T DUPLEX RECEPTACLE TAMPER RESISTANT - 20A/125V/2P/3W/GNEMA 5-20R

GENERAL NOTES:a.)Device placement must be field verified for compliance with allproduct guidelines located in the installation instructions.

b.)Review data sheets and installation instructions for productspecifics and limitations.

c.)See contract documents for engineer's notes to ensurecompliance.

d.)Sensors shall be mounted no closer than 6' to an air supply orreturn diffuser.

TELEPHONE BOARD- 3/4"x8' FIRE RATED

C CAMERA WP J-BOX W/ 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRINGWP

WITH PULLSTRING

CABLE TRAY - 15"X4" WIRE MESH, MFR. CABLOFIL#150-400INCLUDE ALL MOUNTING HARDWARE, RADIUS SPLICES,RADIUS SHIELD,CABLE DROP DOWN FITTING, ETC.. REFER TO PLANS FOR LENGHT

3

E4.1

08/08/18


08/08/18

MEP ENGINEERING


CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen

McAllen

1007 Walnut Ave.


V. 956.686.7771

F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

8/08/2018 6:30:09 PM

LM T

2017.16

PH

AS

E I &

P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

G

RE

NO

VA

TIO

NS

A

ND

A

DD

IT

IO

NS

Edinburg, T

exas

TR

OP

IC

AL T

EX

AS

B

EH

AV

IO

RA

L H

EA

LT

H

00.00.0000

RE

VIS

IO

NS

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IP

TIO

N

03

8-08-18

Addendum

#5

17-20-18

01

7-20-18

Addendum

#1

ELECTRICAL

LEGEND

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

4

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

3

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

2

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

K

AutoCAD SHX Text

TV

AutoCAD SHX Text

TV

AutoCAD SHX Text

#

AutoCAD SHX Text

#

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

TC

AutoCAD SHX Text

LC

AutoCAD SHX Text

PC

AutoCAD SHX Text

IC

AutoCAD SHX Text

IC

AutoCAD SHX Text

DC

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

MD

AutoCAD SHX Text

KP

AutoCAD SHX Text

CR

AutoCAD SHX Text

ML

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

M

AutoCAD SHX Text

av

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

DSW-301

AutoCAD SHX Text

500

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMLS

AutoCAD SHX Text

101

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

211

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

212

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMRC

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

OS2

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMSW-101

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMRC-212

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMRC-211

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMRC-101

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMLS-500

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMDX-100

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMDM-101

AutoCAD SHX Text

LMDC-100

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

SW1

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

SW2

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

LEONARDO MUNOZ

AutoCAD SHX Text

97437

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

P

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

C

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

F

AutoCAD SHX Text

L

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

O

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

R

AutoCAD SHX Text

I

AutoCAD SHX Text

N

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

G

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

D

AutoCAD SHX Text

S

AutoCAD SHX Text

T

AutoCAD SHX Text

E

AutoCAD SHX Text

X

AutoCAD SHX Text

A

LA ENOIS N

LEONARDO MUNOZ

97437

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:00:22 PM

E7.1

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

ELECTRICALSCHEDULES

Light Fixture Schedule

Tag Lamp Voltage Mounting Description Manufacturer ModelA1 LED 4396LM 36W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435LWGEDU

A1E LED 4396LM 36W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435LWGEDUELL14A2 LED 4914LM 39W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435MLGEDU

A2E LED 4914LM 39W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435MLGEDUELL14A3 LED 5606LM 44W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435HLGEDU

A3E LED 5606LM 44W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435HLGEDUELL14A4 LED 7209LM 59W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435VLGEDU

A4E LED 7209LM 59W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435VLGEDUELL14A6 LED 3464LM 30W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435MWGEDU

A6E LED 3464LM 30W 277V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435MWGEDUELL14A7 LED 4396LM 36W 120V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435LWGEDU

A7E LED 4396LM 36W 120V LAY-IN 2'X4' LED TROFFER FIXTURE, UL LISTED, LENS, HIGH EFFICIENCY 0-10V DRIVER Columbia Lighting LCAT2435LWGEDUELL14A8 LED 277V SUSPENDED 4' LED DIRECT/INDIRECT SUSPENDED FIXTURE, UL LISTED, ELECTRONIC DRIVER. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING ACCESSORIES. Focal Point FSM4BS_FLFL_625DN_875UP_35K_1C_UNV_LD1_C48_

WH_4'

A9 LED 277V SUSPENDED 4' LED DIRECT/INDIRECT SUSPENDED FIXTURE, UL LISTED, ELECTRONIC DRIVER. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY MOUNTING ACCESSORIES. Focal Point FSM4BS_FLFL_875DN_875UP_35K_1C_UNV_LD1_C48_WH_4'

B LED 277V SURFACE 4' LED STRIP LIGHT FIXTURE, 0-10V DRIVER, UL LISTED Columbia Lighting LCL435MLEUB2 LED Lamp 120V SURFACE 4' LED STRIP LIGHT FIXTURE, 0-10V DRIVER, UL LISTED Columbia Lighting LCL435MLEUB3 LED Lamp 277V SURFACE 4' LED STRIP LIGHT FIXTURE, 0-10V DRIVER, UL LISTED Columbia Lighting LCL435MLEUE LED 120V/277V SURFACE EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT W/ SELF-DIAGNOSTICS Compass Lighting CU2RCSQSD

E2 LED 120V/277V SURFACE DECORATIVE LED AC/EMERGENCY LIGHT Compass Lighting CUWZ-PCE3 LED 120V/277V SURFACE EXTERIOR REMOTE EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT Compass Lighting CORDG LED 277V SURFACE Wall Mount Linear Fixture Teron Lighting TNO24-L20.1-ZE550 -120-277V-SM-35KG2 LED 120V SURFACE Wall Mount Linear Fixture Teron Lighting TNO24-L20.1-ZE550 -120-277V-SM-35KH LED 1000LM 14W 277V SURFACE 6 INCH LUMINAIRE, WITH 0-10V DRIVER Prescolite LC6SL 6LCSL10L35K8WHWT

H2 LED 1000LM 14W 120V RECESSED 6 INCH LUMINAIRE, WITH 0-10V DRIVER Prescolite LC6SL 6LCSL10L35K8WHWTX1 LED 120V/277V SURFACE LED EXIT UNIT WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTICS Compass Lighting CELS2RNEX2 LED 120V/277V RECESSED LED EXIT UNIT WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTICS Compass Lighting CELR1RNEX3 LED 120V/277V SURFACE LED EXIT UNIT WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTICS Compass Lighting CELS2RNEX4 LED 120V/277V SURFACE LED EXIT/EMERGENCY UNIT WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTICS Compass Lighting CCRRCSDAA LED 277V SURFACE ARCHITECTURAL LED WALL LUMINAIRE, WET LOCATION RATED, UL LISTED Teron Lighting RL_L30.0-ZE1050_277V_BT_40K

AAE LED 277V SURFACE ARCHITECTURAL LED WALL LUMINAIRE, WET LOCATION RATED, UL LISTED Teron Lighting RL_L30.0-ZE1050_277V_BT_40KBB LED 1000LM 14W 277V RECESSED 6 INCH LUMINAIRE, WITH 0-10V DRIVER, RATED FOR WET LOCATION Prescolite LC6SL 6LCSL10L35K8WHWTCC LED 277V SURFACE LED WALL LUMINAIRE, WET LOCATION RATED, UL LISTED Beacon Lighting TRVD36NB804KT3UNVDB

CC2 LED 120V SURFACE LED WALL LUMINAIRE, WET LOCATION RATED, UL LISTED Beacon Lighting TRVD36NB804KT3UNVDBDD LED 277V SURFACE LED BOLLARD WITH ALUMINUM HOUSING, UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS. U.S. Architectural

LightingBPAC12-LED-CL-36LED-NW-_-RAL-8019-T

SL1 LED 277V POLE LED AREA LUMINAIRE, POLE MOUNT LUMINAIRE, INCLUDE BASE COVER, RATED FOR WET LOCATION, UL LISTED, POLE SHALL BE SIZEFOR MIN. 110 MPH, INCLUDE VIBRATION DAMPERS

Beacon Lighting FIXTURE MFR.BEACONVPL-64L-135-4K7-3-UNV-DBPOLE MFR.AMERICAN LITE POLE#SNS-25-50-7-AB-DM19


Beacon Lighting FIXTURE MFR.BEACONVPL-64L-135-4K7-3-UNV-DBPOLE MFR.AMERICAN LITE POLE#SNS-25-50-7-AB-DM28


Beacon Lighting FIXTURE MFR.BEACONVPL-64L-135-4K7-4W-UNV-DBPOLE MFR.AMERICAN LITE POLE#SNS-25-50-7-AB-DM39



SL5 T5 277V POLE LED AREA LUMINAIRE, POLE MOUNT LUMINAIRE, INCLUDE BASE COVER, RATED FOR WET LOCATION, UL LISTED, POLE SHALL BE SIZEFOR MIN. 110 MPH, INCLUDE VIBRATION DAMPERS


GENERAL NOTES:1.) EQUAL MANUFACTURER SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE WITH EQUAL PERFORMANCE OF SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT AND APPROVED BY ENGINEER.2.) SUBMIT EQUAL MANUFACTURERS TO ENGINEER 10 DAYS PRIOR TO BID DATE.3.) SUBMIT LIGHT FIXTURES CUTSHEETS TO OWNER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO ORDER.4.) CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT ANY IRRIGATION SPRINKLER HEAD IS AWAY FROM ANY LIGHT POLE A MINIMUM OF 75' TO AVOID CONSISTENT WATER TO LIGHT POLE. COORDINATEWITH IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

5.) ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE OF NON-CORROSIVE MATERIAL (STAINLESS STEEL).6.) ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES; LITHONIA, GOTHAM.

Electrical Disconnect Schedule

Mark DescriptionAHU-1 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-2 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-3 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-4 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-5 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-6 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-7 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-8 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1, 208V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTAHU-9 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECT

COMPRESSOR 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1, 277V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTCU-1 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-2 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-3 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-4 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-5 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-6 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-7 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-8 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N3R,208V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTCU-9 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R,480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECT

FCCU-1 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N3R,208V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECTPANEL-R2 DISC. 200AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N3R, 480V, S/N, H.D. FUSED DISCONNECT @ 200AMPS

RTU-1 60AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTRTU-2 30AMP, 3-PHASE, 4W, N1, 480V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTUH-1 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1, 208V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTUH-2 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1, 208V, S/N, N.F., H.D. DISCONNECTWH-1 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1,120V, S/N, N.F., H.D. ROTARY TYPE DISCONNECTWH-2 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1,120V, S/N, N.F., H.D. ROTARY TYPE DISCONNECTWH-3 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1,120V, S/N, N.F., H.D. ROTARY TYPE DISCONNECTWH-4 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1,120V, S/N, N.F., H.D. ROTARY TYPE DISCONNECTWH-5 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1,120V, S/N, N.F., H.D. ROTARY TYPE DISCONNECTWH-6 30AMP, 1-PHASE, 3W, N1,120V, S/N, N.F., H.D. ROTARY TYPE DISCONNECT

GENERAL NOTES:1.) REFER TO BREAKER SIZE FOR FUSE SIZE.2.) REFER TO PANELBOARD FOR DISCONNECT PHASES AND VOLTAGE.

Notes:

Lighting 18080 VA 125.00% 22600 VA

Power 4503 VA 100.00% 4503 VA Total Est. Demand: 342 A

Receptacle 68620 VA 57.29% 39310 VA Total Conn.: 372 A

Other 15200 VA 100.00% 15200 VA Total Est. Demand: 284360 VA

HVAC 197947 VA 100.00% 197947 VA Total Conn. Load: 309150 VA

Equipment 4800 VA 100.00% 4800 VA

Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated Demand Panel Totals

Total Amps: 401 A 376 A 346 A

Total Load: 110051 VA 103172 VA 95927 VA

MDP-63 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space MDP-64





MDP-53 -- -- -- -- 4155 VA 3324 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-54

MDP-51 -- -- -- -- 4155 VA 3324 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-52

MDP-49 HVAC 20 A 3 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 4155 VA 3324 VA 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 3 20 A HVAC MDP-50

MDP-47 -- -- -- -- 2770 VA 4155 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-48

MDP-45 -- -- -- -- 2770 VA 4155 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-46


MDP-41 -- -- -- -- 2770 VA 4709 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-42

MDP-39 -- -- -- -- 2770 VA 4709 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-40


MDP-35 -- -- -- -- 4155 VA 2770 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-36

MDP-33 -- -- -- -- 4155 VA 2770 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-34


MDP-29 -- -- -- -- 7202 VA 7202 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-30

MDP-27 -- -- -- -- 7202 VA 7202 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-28


MDP-23 -- -- -- -- 7202 VA 4155 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-24

MDP-21 -- -- -- -- 7202 VA 4155 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-22


MDP-17 -- -- -- -- 4155 VA 4155 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-18

MDP-15 -- -- -- -- 4155 VA 4155 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-16


MDP-11 -- -- -- -- 9660 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space MDP-12

MDP-9 -- -- -- -- 12460 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space MDP-10

MDP-7 TX-R2 20 A 3 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 15720 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space MDP-8

MDP-5 -- -- -- -- 16100 VA 7288 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-6

MDP-3 -- -- -- -- 23775 VA 4058 VA -- -- -- -- MDP-4

MDP-1 TX-R1 20 A 3 4#6, 1#10G,1"C 24718 VA 6735 VA 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 3 20 A Panel-L1 MDP-2

CKT Circuit Description Trip Poles Comments A B C Comments Poles Trip Circuit Description CKT

Enclosure: Type 1 MCB Rating: 600 A

Mounting: Surface Wires: 4 Mains Rating: 600 A

Supply From: Phases: 3 Mains Type: MLO

Location: MECHANICAL C112 Volts: 480/277 Wye A.I.C. Rating:

Branch Panel: MDP

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

3

3

Notes:

Total Est. Demand: 7 A

Total Conn.: 6 A

Lighting 1296 VA 125.00% 1620 VA Total Est. Demand: 5720 VA

Receptacle 3500 VA 100.00% 3500 VA Total Conn. Load: 5396 VA

Other 600 VA 100.00% 600 VA




HP-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare HP-42



HP-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space HP-36















HP-5 -- -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space HP-6

HP-3 -- -- -- -- 1500 VA 600 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A PC/LC HP-4

HP-1 HPL 20 A 3 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 2000 VA 1296 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Lighting HP-2





Location: Volts: 480/277 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: HP

3

LA ENOIS N

LEONARDO MUNOZ

97437

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:00:23 PM

E7.2

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

ELECTRICALSCHEDULES

Notes:


Total Conn.: 22 A

Total Est. Demand: 22600 VA

Lighting 18080 VA 125.00% 22600 VA Total Conn. Load: 18080 VA

Other 0 VA 0.00% 0 VA




L1-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare L1-42



L1-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space L1-36











L1-13 Exterior Lighting 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 320 VA 270 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Exterior Lighting L1-14

L1-11 Exterior Lighting 20 A 1 2#6, 1#10G,1"C 1485 VA 3000 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Emergency/Exits L1-12

L1-9 Exterior Lighting 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 349 VA 1080 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Exterior Lighting L1-10

L1-7 Lighting 20 A 1 2#8, 1#10G,3/4"C 2726 VA 319 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Exterior Lighting L1-8

L1-5 Lighting 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1320 VA 1483 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Lighting L1-6






Supply From: MDP Phases: 3 Mains Type: MLO

Location: MECHANICAL C113 Volts: 480/277 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: L1

Notes:


Total Conn.: 10 A


Total Conn. Load: 3500 VA

Receptacle 3500 VA 100.00% 3500 VA




HPL-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare HPL-42



HPL-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space HPL-36
















HPL-3 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 1500 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle HPL-4

HPL-1 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#6, 1#10G,1"C 1000 VA 1000 VA 2#6, 1#10G,1"C 1 20 A Receptacle HPL-2




Supply From: TX-HPL Phases: 3 Mains Type: MB

Location: Volts: 120/208 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: HPL

Notes:





Equipment 4800 VA 100.00% 4800 VA




R1-63 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare R1-64



R1-57 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space R1-58






R1-45 -- -- -- -- 4155 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space R1-46

R1-43 HVAC 20 A 2 3#6, 1#10G,1"C 4155 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space R1-44

R1-41 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1200 VA 360 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle R1-42

R1-39 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1500 VA 1200 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Other R1-40

R1-37 Power 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1500 VA 1500 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Power R1-38

R1-35 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 600 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle R1-36















R1-5 -- -- -- -- 7800 VA 800 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle R1-6


R1-1 PANEL-C1 20 A 3 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 8403 VA 1200 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Receptacle R1-2




Supply From: TX-R1 Phases: 3 Mains Type: MB


Branch Panel: R1

Notes:


Power 1500 VA 100.00% 1500 VA Total Conn.: 105 A

Receptacle 26340 VA 68.98% 18170 VA Total Est. Demand: 29670 VA

Other 9000 VA 100.00% 9000 VA Total Conn. Load: 37840 VA

HVAC 1000 VA 100.00% 1000 VA









R2-31 -- -- -- -- 500 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space R2-32

R2-29 HVAC 20 A 2 3#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 500 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space R2-30


R2-25 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 180 VA 1500 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A WH-6 R2-26












R2-1 C2 20 A 3 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 8400 VA 1200 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle R2-2




Supply From: TX-R2 Phases: 3 Mains Type: MB


Branch Panel: R2

Notes:

Lighting 2007 VA 125.00% 2509 VA





Equipment 20400 VA 100.00% 20400 VA




WR-63 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space WR-64










WR-43 -- -- -- -- 2912 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space WR-44

WR-41 HVAC 20 A 2 2912 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space WR-42

WR-39 -- -- -- -- 500 VA 0 VA -- -- -- -- WR-40

WR-37 UH-1 20 A 2 3#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 500 VA 1200 VA 3#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 2 20 A HVLS-1 WR-38

WR-35 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 180 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space WR-36

WR-33 Access Control Panel 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 1500 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle WR-34

WR-31 Access Control 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 600 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Security Panel WR-32

WR-29 -- -- -- -- 2600 VA 1248 VA -- -- -- -- WR-30

WR-27 AHU-8 20 A 2 3#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 2600 VA 1248 VA 3#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 2 20 A CU-8 WR-28

WR-25 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 1500 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A WH-1 WR-26

WR-23 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 600 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle WR-24

WR-21 Lighting 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 640 VA 600 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Power Supply WR-22

WR-19 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 180 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle WR-20



WR-13 -- -- -- -- 4800 VA 1200 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Equipment WR-14

WR-11 Equipment 30 A 2 3#6, 1#10G,1"C 4800 VA 4800 VA -- -- -- -- WR-12

WR-9 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 4800 VA 3#6, 1#10G,1"C 2 30 A Equipment WR-10




WR-1 Lighting 20 A 1 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 960 VA 407 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Lighting WR-2




Supply From: TX-WR Phases: 3 Mains Type: MB

Location: STORAGE S100 Volts: 120/208 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: WR

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

3

LA ENOIS N

LEONARDO MUNOZ

97437

F

N

PR

SCEF

LI

O

E

ATTE

S

O

ER

INSG

EED

S

TEXA



CONSULTANTS:


McAllen Harlingen


McAllen, Texas 78501V. 956.686.7771F. 956.687.3433

www.rofainc.com

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

14 1513121110987654321

PROJECT NO:

DATE:

DWN BY:CK BY:

STARTING DATE:

08/08/18

8/8/2018 5:00:25 PM

E7.3

Checker Author

2017.16

PH

AS

E I

& P

HA

SE

II B

UIL

DIN

GR

EN

OV

AT

ION

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

Edi

nbur

g,

T

exas

TR

OP

ICA

L T

EX

AS

BE

HA

VIO

RA

L H

EA

LTH

00.00.0000

ELECTRICALSCHEDULES

Notes:





Equipment 4800 VA 100.00% 4800 VA




C1-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare C1-42



C1-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space C1-36



C1-29 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 800 VA 200 VA 1 20 A Receptacle C1-30

C1-27 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 200 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space C1-28

C1-25 Power 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 3 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space C1-26

C1-23 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 200 VA 600 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Other C1-24


C1-19 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 1200 VA 2#8, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Receptacle C1-20


C1-15 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 2400 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Equipment C1-16

C1-13 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 600 VA 2400 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Equipment C1-14


C1-9 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 800 VA 1200 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Receptacle C1-10








Supply From: R1 Phases: 3 Mains Type: MLO


Branch Panel: C1

Notes:


Total Conn.: 47 A


Receptacle 8600 VA 100.00% 8600 VA Total Conn. Load: 17000 VA

Other 8400 VA 100.00% 8400 VA























C2-3 Other 20 A 1 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1600 VA 800 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Other C2-4

C2-1 Other 20 A 1 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 2400 VA 2400 VA 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1 20 A Other C2-2




Supply From: R2 Phases: 3 Mains Type: MLO


Branch Panel: C2

Notes:

Lighting 2866 VA 125.00% 3583 VA





Equipment 3600 VA 100.00% 3600 VA




LC-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare LC-42



LC-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space LC-36













LC-9 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 6648 VA -- -- -- -- LC-10

LC-7 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 6648 VA -- -- -- -- LC-8

LC-5 -- -- -- -- 5060 VA 6648 VA 4#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 3 20 A HVAC LC-6

LC-3 -- -- -- -- 5140 VA 538 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Lighting LC-4

LC-1 TX-RC 20 A 3 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 6640 VA 2328 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Lighting LC-2





Location: STOR. A101 Volts: 480/277 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: LC

Notes:

Lighting 1867 VA 125.00% 2334 VA





Equipment 2400 VA 100.00% 2400 VA




LC2-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare LC2-42



LC2-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space LC2-36













LC2-9 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 6648 VA -- -- -- -- LC2-10

LC2-7 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 6648 VA -- -- -- -- LC2-8

LC2-5 -- -- -- -- 6740 VA 6648 VA 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 3 20 A HVAC LC2-6

LC2-3 -- -- -- -- 4560 VA 742 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Lighting LC2-4

LC2-1 TX-RC2 20 A 3 4#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 6060 VA 1269 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Lighting LC2-2





Location: JANITOR B109 Volts: 480/277 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: LC2

Notes:





Equipment 3600 VA 100.00% 3600 VA




RC-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare RC-42



RC-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space RC-36



RC-29 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 200 VA 200 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Other RC-30

RC-27 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 200 VA 200 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Other RC-28

RC-25 Power 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1500 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space RC-26

RC-23 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 200 VA 2400 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Equipment RC-24

RC-21 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 200 VA 800 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle RC-22






RC-9 Power 20 A 1 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1400 VA 360 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle RC-10




RC-1 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 800 VA 2400 VA 2#6, 1#10G,1"C 1 20 A Other RC-2




Supply From: TX-RC Phases: 3 Mains Type: MB

Location: STOR. A101 Volts: 120/208 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: RC

Notes:





Equipment 2400 VA 100.00% 2400 VA




RC2-41 Spare 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare RC2-42



RC2-35 Space -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space RC2-36



RC2-29 Receptacle 20 A 1 400 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space RC2-30

RC2-27 Other 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 200 VA 200 VA 1 20 A Other RC2-28

RC2-25 Power 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1500 VA 200 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Other RC2-26

RC2-23 Power 20 A 1 2#10, 1#10G,3/4"C 1400 VA 400 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle RC2-24

RC2-21 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 400 VA 800 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Other RC2-22

RC2-19 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1200 VA 0 VA -- -- -- Space RC2-20

RC2-17 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 180 VA 2400 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Equipment RC2-18

RC2-15 Receptacle 20 A 1 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 800 VA 800 VA 2#12, 1#12G,1/2"C 1 20 A Receptacle RC2-16











Supply From: TX-RC2 Phases: 3 Mains Type: MB

Location: JANITOR B109 Volts: 120/208 Wye A.I.C. Rating: 10

Branch Panel: RC2

RE

VIS

ION

S

NO

.D

AT

ED

ES

CR

IPT

I ON

38

-08-

1 8A

dden

dum

#5

3

3

3

3

2017.16 PHASE I AND PHASE II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ...€¦ · ΔΔΔΔΔ addenda (number‐5)...

Documents

Transcript of 2017.16 PHASE I AND PHASE II BUILDING RENOVATIONS AND ...€¦ · ΔΔΔΔΔ addenda (number‐5)...